You are on page 1of 225

LTE TDD

eRAN11.1
Optional Feature Description

Issue 02

Date 2016-07-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2016. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description Contents

Contents

1 Change History .............................................................................................................................. 1


2 Voice & Other Services ................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 VoLTE ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1.1 TDLOFD-001016 VoIP Semi-persistent Scheduling ................................................................................................. 3
2.1.2 TDLOFD-001017 RObust Header Compression (ROHC) ........................................................................................ 4
2.1.3 TDLOFD-001048 TTI Bundling ............................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.4 TDLOFD-081229 Voice Characteristic Awareness Scheduling ................................................................................. 6
2.1.5 TDLOFD-111202 Coverage-based VoLTE Experience Optimization ....................................................................... 8
2.1.6 TDLOFD-111207 VoLTE Rate Control ..................................................................................................................... 9
2.1.7 TDLOFD-001022 SRVCC to UTRAN .................................................................................................................... 11
2.1.8 TDLOFD-001023 SRVCC to GERAN .................................................................................................................... 12
2.2 CSFB .......................................................................................................................................................................... 14
2.2.1 TDLOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN ............................................................................................................. 14
2.2.2 TDLOFD-001052 Flash CS Fallback to UTRAN ................................................................................................... 15
2.2.3 TDLOFD-001068 CS Fallback with LAI to UTRAN ............................................................................................. 17
2.2.4 TDLOFD-001088 CS Fallback Steering to UTRAN ............................................................................................... 18
2.2.5 TDLOFD-081223 Ultra-Flash CSFB to UTRAN .................................................................................................... 19
2.2.6 TDLOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN ............................................................................................................. 21
2.2.7 TDLOFD-001053 Flash CS Fallback to GERAN ................................................................................................... 22
2.2.8 TDLOFD-001069 CS Fallback with LAI to GERAN ............................................................................................. 23
2.2.9 TDLOFD-001089 CS Fallback Steering to GERAN ............................................................................................... 24
2.2.10 TDLOFD-081203 Ultra-Flash CSFB to GERAN .................................................................................................. 25
2.2.11 TDLOFD-001035 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT ......................................................................................... 27
2.2.12 TDLOFD-001090 Enhanced CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT ........................................................................ 29
2.2.13 TDLOFD-001091 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT Based on Frequency-specific Factors ............................. 30
2.3 Increment Value Service ............................................................................................................................................. 32
2.3.1 TDLOFD-001047 LoCation Services(LCS) ............................................................................................................ 32
2.3.2 TDLOFD-001092 CMAS Support........................................................................................................................... 33
2.3.3 TDLOFD-081222 Dynamic Service-specific Access Control ................................................................................. 34
2.3.4 TDLOFD-070220 eMBMS Phase 1 based on Centralized MCE Architecture ........................................................ 36
2.3.4.1 TDLOFD-07022001 Multi-cell transmission in MBSFN area ............................................................................. 38
2.3.4.2 TDLOFD-07022002 Mixed transmission of unicast and broadcast...................................................................... 39

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description Contents

2.3.4.3 TDLOFD-07022003 Data synchronization ........................................................................................................... 40


2.3.4.4 TDLOFD-07022004 Session admission control ................................................................................................... 41
2.3.5 TDLOFD-080210 eMBMS Service Continuity ....................................................................................................... 42
2.4 Video Service Optimization ........................................................................................................................................ 43
2.4.1 TDLOFD-111205 Busy-Hour Download Rate Control ........................................................................................... 43
2.4.2 TDLOFD-111206 Video Service Rate Adaption...................................................................................................... 44
2.4.3 TDLOFD-110225 Uplink Data Compression .......................................................................................................... 45

3 Radio & Performance ................................................................................................................. 47


3.1 2-layer Mutil-Antenna ................................................................................................................................................ 47
3.1.1 TDLOFD-001001 DL 2x2 MIMO ........................................................................................................................... 47
3.1.2 TDLOFD-001030 Support of UE Category 2/3/4 ................................................................................................... 48
3.1.3 TDLOFD-001049 Single Streaming Beamforming ................................................................................................. 49
3.1.4 TDLOFD-001061 Dual Streaming Beamforming ................................................................................................... 50
3.1.5 TDLOFD-001077 MU-Beamforming...................................................................................................................... 51
3.1.6 TDLOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna Receive Diversity ............................................................................................... 53
3.1.7 TDLOFD-001058 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO ................................................................................................................... 54
3.1.8 TDLOFD-001062 UL 8-Antenna Receive Diversity ............................................................................................... 55
3.1.9 TDLOFD-081205 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO ................................................................................................................... 56
3.2 Interference Handling ................................................................................................................................................. 57
3.2.1 TDLOFD-001012 UL Interference Rejection Combining ....................................................................................... 57
3.2.2 TDLOFD-060201 Adaptive Inter-Cell Interference Coordination ........................................................................... 58
3.2.3 TDLOFD-001094 Control Channel IRC ................................................................................................................. 59
3.2.4 TDLOFD-001075 SFN ............................................................................................................................................ 60
3.2.5 TDLOFD-002008 Adaptive SFN/SDMA ................................................................................................................ 62
3.2.6 TDLOFD-001098 Inter-BBP SFN ........................................................................................................................... 63
3.2.7 TDLOFD-001080 Inter-BBU SFN .......................................................................................................................... 64
3.2.8 TDLOFD-001081 Inter-BBP Adaptive SFN/SDMA ............................................................................................... 65
3.2.9 TDLOFD-001082 Inter-BBU Adaptive SFN/SDMA .............................................................................................. 66
3.2.10 TDLOFD-070227 PDCCH DCS in SFN ............................................................................................................... 67
3.2.11 TDLOFD-081221 PDCCH SDMA in SFN ............................................................................................................ 68
3.2.12 TDLOFD-070223 Multi-Cell Interference Randomizing and Coordination ......................................................... 69
3.2.13 TDLOFD-080203 Coordinated Scheduling based Power Control ......................................................................... 70
3.2.14 TDLOFD-081217 Interference Detection and Suppression ................................................................................... 71
3.2.15 TDLOFD-081219 Interference Based Uplink Power Control ............................................................................... 72
3.2.16 TDLOFD-081232 Enhanced Uplink Power Control ............................................................................................. 73
3.2.17 TDLOFD-110205 Intra-eNodeB Uplink Coordinated Scheduling ..................................................................... 74
3.2.18 TDLOFD-110206 Inter-eNodeB Uplink Coordinated Scheduling ........................................................................ 75
3.2.19 TDLOFD-111208 Uplink Interference Coordination............................................................................................. 76
3.2.20 TDLOFD-111201 Remote Interference Adaptive Avoidance ................................................................................ 77
3.2.21 TDLOFD-001066 Intra-eNodeB UL CoMP .......................................................................................................... 79
3.2.22 TDLOFD-081207 UL CoMP based on Coordinated BBU .................................................................................... 81

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description Contents

3.3 QoS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 84


3.3.1 TDLOFD-001026 Optional uplink-downlink subframe configuration .................................................................... 84
3.3.1.1 TDLOFD-00102601 uplink-downlink subframe configuration type 0 ................................................................. 84
3.3.1.2 TDLOFD-00102602 uplink-downlink special subframe configuration type 4 ..................................................... 85
3.3.1.3 TDLOFD-00102603 uplink-downlink special subframe configuration type 5 ..................................................... 86
3.3.1.4 TDLOFD-00102604 uplink-downlink special subframe configuration type 6 ..................................................... 87
3.3.1.5 TDLOFD-00102605 uplink-downlink special subframe configuration type 9 ..................................................... 88
3.3.2 TDLOFD-001006 UL 64QAM ................................................................................................................................ 89
3.3.3 TDLOFD-110227 Traffic Model Based Performance Optimization ....................................................................... 90
3.3.4 TDLOFD-001015 Enhanced Scheduling ................................................................................................................. 91
3.3.4.1 TDLOFD-00101501 CQI Adjustment .................................................................................................................. 91
3.3.4.2 TDLOFD-00101502 Dynamic Scheduling ........................................................................................................... 92
3.3.5 TDLOFD-081231 Optimized CFI-Calculation-based MCS Index Selection .......................................................... 93
3.3.6 TDLOFD-081233 Optimized Uplink Resource Allocation ..................................................................................... 94
3.3.7 TDLOFD-070222 Scheduling Based on Max Bit Rate ........................................................................................... 95
3.3.8 TDLOFD-001028 TCP Proxy Enhancer (TPE) ....................................................................................................... 95
3.3.9 TDLOFD-001027 Active Queue Management (AQM) ........................................................................................... 96
3.3.10 TDLOFD-001029 Enhanced Admission Control ................................................................................................... 97
3.3.10.1 TDLOFD-00102901 Radio/transport Resource Pre-emption ............................................................................. 97
3.3.11 TDLOFD-001054 Flexible User Steering .............................................................................................................. 98
3.3.11.1 TDLOFD-00105401 Camp & Handover Based on SPID ................................................................................... 98
3.3.11.2 TDLOFD-00105402 WBB Subscriber Identification and Specified QoS Guarantee ....................................... 100
3.3.12 TDLOFD-001059 UL Pre-allocation Based on SPID .......................................................................................... 102
3.3.13 TDLOFD-001109 DL Non-GBR Packet Bundling .............................................................................................. 102
3.4 Smart Phone Optimization ........................................................................................................................................ 103
3.4.1 TDLOFD-001105 Dynamic DRX.......................................................................................................................... 103
3.4.1.1 TDLOFD-00110501 Dynamic DRX ................................................................................................................... 103
3.4.1.2 TDLOFD-00110502 High-Mobility-Triggered Idle Mode ................................................................................. 104
3.4.2 TDLOFD-080202 Intelligent Access Class Control .............................................................................................. 105
3.5 Inter-RAT Mobility Solution ..................................................................................................................................... 106
3.5.1 TDLOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and UTRAN ....................................................... 106
3.5.2 TDLOFD-001043 Service based Inter-RAT handover to UTRAN ........................................................................ 109
3.5.3 TDLOFD-001072 Distance based Inter-RAT handover to UTRAN ...................................................................... 110
3.5.4 TDLOFD-001078 E-UTRAN to UTRAN CS/PS Steering .................................................................................... 110
3.5.5 TDLOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and GERAN ....................................................... 111
3.5.6 TDLOFD-001046 Service based Inter-RAT handover to GERAN ........................................................................ 114
3.5.7 TDLOFD-001073 Distance based Inter-RAT handover to GERAN ...................................................................... 115
3.5.8 TDLOFD-001021 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and CDMA2000 ................................................. 115
3.5.9 TDLOFD-001111 PS Mobility from E-UTRAN to CDMA2000 HRPD Based on Frequency-specific Factors ... 117
3.5.10 TDLOFD-001050 Mobility between LTE TDD and LTE FDD ........................................................................... 118
3.6 High Speed Mobility................................................................................................................................................. 119
3.6.1 TDLOFD-001007 High Speed Mobility ................................................................................................................ 119

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description Contents

3.6.2 TDLOFD-080205 Handover Enhancement at Speed Mobility .............................................................................. 121


3.7 Coverage Enhancement ............................................................................................................................................ 123
3.7.1 TDLOFD-001009 Extended Cell Access Radius ................................................................................................... 123
3.7.2 TDLOFD-001031 Extended CP ............................................................................................................................ 124
3.8 WBB ......................................................................................................................................................................... 125
3.8.1 TDLOFD-110223 Specified Service Carrier ......................................................................................................... 125

4 Networking & Transmission & Security .............................................................................. 127


4.1 Transmission & Synchronization .............................................................................................................................. 127
4.1.1 TDLOFD-001076 CPRI Compression................................................................................................................... 127
4.1.2 TDLOFD-081214 Enhanced CPRI Compression .................................................................................................. 128
4.1.3 TDLOFD-003002 2G/3G and LTE Co-transmission ............................................................................................. 129
4.1.4 TDLOFD-003011 Enhanced Transmission QoS Management .............................................................................. 130
4.1.4.1 TDLOFD-00301101 Transport Overbooking ..................................................................................................... 130
4.1.4.2 TDLOFD-00301102 Transport Differentiated Flow Control .............................................................................. 131
4.1.4.3 TDLOFD-00301103 Transport Resource Overload Control ............................................................................... 132
4.1.5 TDLOFD-003012 IP Performance Monitoring ...................................................................................................... 133
4.1.5.1 TDLOFD-00301201 IP Performance Monitoring ............................................................................................... 133
4.1.5.2 TDLOFD-00301202 Transport Dynamic Flow Control ..................................................................................... 133
4.1.6 TDLOFD-003018 IP Active Performance Measurement ....................................................................................... 134
4.1.7 TDLOFD-003013 Enhanced Synchronization ....................................................................................................... 136
4.1.7.1 TDLOFD-00301302 IEEE1588 V2 Clock Synchronization ............................................................................... 136
4.1.8 TDLOFD-081213 Inter-BBU Clock Sharing ......................................................................................................... 139
4.1.9 TDLOFD-003016 Different Transport Paths based on QoS Grade ....................................................................... 140
4.1.10 TDLOFD-001134 Virtual Routing and Forwarding ............................................................................................. 141
4.1.11 TDLOFD-003017 S1 and X2 over IPv6 .............................................................................................................. 142
4.1.12 TDLOFD-003024 IPsec for IPv6 ......................................................................................................................... 143
4.2 Security ..................................................................................................................................................................... 145
4.2.1 TDLOFD-001010 Security Mechanism ................................................................................................................. 145
4.2.1.1 TDLOFD-00101001 Encryption: AES ............................................................................................................... 145
4.2.1.2 TDLOFD-00101002 Encryption: SNOW 3G ..................................................................................................... 145
4.2.1.3 TDLOFD-00101003 Encryption: ZUC ............................................................................................................... 146
4.2.2 TDLOFD-003009 IPsec ......................................................................................................................................... 147
4.2.3 TDLOFD-081211 eNodeB Supporting IPsec Redirection ..................................................................................... 148
4.2.4 TDLOFD-003010 Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) ............................................................................................... 150
4.2.5 TDLOFD-081206 eNodeB Supporting Multi-operator PKI .................................................................................. 152
4.2.6 TDLOFD-003014 Integrated Firewall ................................................................................................................... 154
4.2.6.1 TDLOFD-00301401 Access Control List (ACL) ............................................................................................... 154
4.2.6.2 TDLOFD-00301402 Access Control List (ACL) autogeneration ....................................................................... 154
4.2.7 TDLOFD-003015 Access Control based on 802.1x .............................................................................................. 155
4.2.8 TDLOFD-070211 IPsec Redundancy among Multi-SeGWs ................................................................................. 156
4.2.9 TDLOFD-070212 eNodeB Supporting PKI Redundancy ..................................................................................... 158

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description Contents

4.3 Reliability ................................................................................................................................................................. 159


4.3.1 TDLOFD-001018 S1-flex ...................................................................................................................................... 159
4.3.2 TDLOFD-003004 Ethernet OAM .......................................................................................................................... 161
4.3.2.1 TDLOFD-00300401 Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.3ah) ......................................................................................... 161
4.3.2.2 TDLOFD-00300403 Ethernet OAM (Y.1731) .................................................................................................... 162
4.3.3 TDLOFD-003005 OM Channel Backup ................................................................................................................ 163
4.3.4 TDLOFD-003006 IP Route Backup ...................................................................................................................... 163
4.3.5 TDLOFD-003007 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection ......................................................................................... 164
4.3.6 TDLOFD-003008 Ethernet Link Aggregation (IEEE 802.3ad) ............................................................................. 165
4.4 RAN Sharing ............................................................................................................................................................ 167
4.4.1 TDLOFD-001036 RAN Sharing with Common Carrier ........................................................................................ 167
4.4.2 TDLOFD-001037 RAN Sharing with Dedicated Carrier ...................................................................................... 168
4.4.3 TDLOFD-081224 Hybrid RAN Sharing ............................................................................................................... 170
4.4.4 TDLOFD-001086 RAN Sharing by More Operators ............................................................................................ 172
4.4.5 TDLOFD-001112 MOCN Flexible Priority Based Camping ................................................................................ 173
4.4.6 TDLOFD-001133 Multi Operators SPID Policy ................................................................................................... 174
4.5 Advance Micro.......................................................................................................................................................... 175
4.5.1 TDLOFD-001057 Load Balancing based on Transport QoS ................................................................................. 175
4.5.2 TDLOFD-003022 PPPoE ...................................................................................................................................... 176

5 O&M ............................................................................................................................................ 177


5.1 SON .......................................................................................................................................................................... 177
5.1.1 TDLOFD-002001 Automatic Neighbour Relation (ANR) .................................................................................... 177
5.1.2 TDLOFD-002002 Inter-RAT ANR ........................................................................................................................ 179
5.1.3 TDLOFD-002004 Self-configuration .................................................................................................................... 182
5.1.4 TDLOFD-002007 PCI Collision Detection & Self-Optimization ......................................................................... 184
5.1.5 TDLOFD-110231 Auto Neighbor Group Configuration ....................................................................................... 186
5.1.6 TDLOFD-002005 Mobility Robust Optimization (MRO)..................................................................................... 187
5.1.7 TDLOFD-081201 Specified PCI Group-based Neighboring Cell Management ................................................... 189
5.1.8 TDLOFD-081209 Automatic Congestion Handling .............................................................................................. 190
5.1.9 TDLOFD-002011 Antenna Fault Detection ........................................................................................................... 192
5.1.10 TDLOFD-002012 Cell Outage Detection and Compensation ............................................................................. 193
5.2 MLB ......................................................................................................................................................................... 194
5.2.1 TDLOFD-001032 Intra-LTE Load Balancing ....................................................................................................... 194
5.2.2 TDLOFD-001123 Enhanced Intra-LTE Load Balancing ....................................................................................... 196
5.2.3 TDLOFD-070215 Intra-LTE User Number Load Balancing ................................................................................. 197
5.2.4 TDLOFD-081210 Multi-RRU Cell Load Balancing ............................................................................................. 198
5.2.5 TDLOFD-001044 Inter-RAT Load Sharing to UTRAN ........................................................................................ 199
5.2.6 TDLOFD-001045 Inter-RAT Load Sharing to GERAN ........................................................................................ 201
5.3 Power Saving ............................................................................................................................................................ 202
5.3.1 TDLOFD-001039 RF Channel Intelligent Shutdown ............................................................................................ 202
5.3.2 TDLOFD-001040 Low Power Consumption Mode .............................................................................................. 203

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description Contents

5.3.3 TDLOFD-001041 Power Consumption Monitoring .............................................................................................. 204


5.3.4 TDLOFD-001042 Intelligent Power-Off of Carriers in the Same Coverage ......................................................... 204
5.3.5 TDLOFD-001056 PSU Intelligent Sleep Mode ..................................................................................................... 205
5.3.6 TDLOFD-001070 Symbol Power Saving .............................................................................................................. 206
5.3.7 TDLOFD-001071 Intelligent Battery Management ............................................................................................... 208
5.4 Antenna Management ............................................................................................................................................... 209
5.4.1 TDLOFD-001024 Remote Electrical Tilt Control ................................................................................................. 209

6 Acronyms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................. 211

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 1 Change History

1 Change History

Issue Date Author Change Description

02 2016-07 Xu Xiaohong This is Issue 02 for GA version.


-30
01 2016-01 Xu Nan This is Issue 01.
-01
Draft A 2015-11 Xu Nan This document is based on LTE TDD eRAN11.0
-18 Optional Feature Description. The following
features have been added or enhanced:
New features:
 TDLOFD-111207 VoLTE Rate Control
 TDLOFD-111202 Coverage-based VoLTE
Experience Optimization
 TDLOFD-111205 Busy-Hour Download Rate
Control
 TDLOFD-111206 Video Service Rate
Adaption
 TDLOFD-110225 Uplink Data Compression
 TDLOFD-111208 Uplink Interference
Coordination
 TDLOFD-111201 Remote Interference
Adaptive Avoidance
Enhanced features:
 TDLOFD-081222 Dynamic Service-specific
Access Control
 TDLOFD-081222 Dynamic Service-specific
Access Control
 TDLOFD-080202 Intelligent Access Class
Control
 TDLOFD-081213 Inter-BBU Clock Sharing
 TDLOFD-070211 IPsec Redundancy among
Multi-SeGWs
 TDLOFD-003007 Bidirectional Forwarding

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 1 Change History

Issue Date Author Change Description


Detection
 TDLOFD-002001 Automatic Neighbour
Relation (ANR)
 TDLOFD-002002 Inter-RAT ANR
 TDLOFD-002004 Self-configuration
 TDLOFD-110231 Auto Neighbor Group
Configuration
 TDLOFD-081209 Automatic Congestion
Handling
 TDLOFD-001032 Intra-LTE Load Balancing
 TDLOFD-070215 Intra-LTE User Number
Load Balancing
 TDLOFD-001024 Remote Electrical Tilt
Control

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

2 Voice & Other Services

2.1 VoLTE
2.1.1 TDLOFD-001016 VoIP Semi-persistent Scheduling
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.
This feature is applicable to micro eNodeBs from LTE TDD eRAN6.1.

Summary
Semi-persistent scheduling is a technique for efficiently assigning resources for spurts of
traffic in a wireless communications system. A semi-persistent resource assignment is valid as
long as more data is sent within a predetermined time period after the last data sent, and
expires if no data is sent within the predetermined time period. For voice over IP (VoIP)
services, a semi-persistent resource assignment may be granted for a voice frame in
anticipation of a voice service traffic spurt.

Benefits
This feature is essential to VoIP services and provides the following benefits:
 Guarantees the QoS for VoIP services.
 Reduces the control signaling overhead for VoIP transmission.
 Maximizes resource utilization by dynamically activating or deactivating resource
allocation according to the transition between silent period and talk spurt.

Description
This feature is essential to delivery of the voice service with acceptable quality. E-UTRAN is
optimized in terms of packet data transfer, and the core network is purely IP packet-based.
The voice service data is transmitted by means of VoIP instead of using the traditional
circuit-based method. To ensure voice quality, a semi-persistent scheduling solution is used
for VoIP services.
VoIP is a real-time service with small and fixed-length data packets and constant arrival time.
VoIP traffic consists of talk spurts and silent periods. The adaptive multirate (AMR) codec can

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

yield quiet burst voice traffic. During a talk spurt, VoIP packets normally arrive at intervals of
20 ms. During a silent period, silence indicator (SID) packets arrive at intervals of 160 ms.
During semi-persistent scheduling, the eNodeB allocates a certain amount of resources (such
as resource blocks) for the voice call during the call setup period by using radio resource
control (RRC) signaling. The allocation is semi-persistent and does not require a repeat
request by using UL/DL control signaling until the call is complete and the resources are
released. To maximize resource utilization during a silent period, resource allocation is
deactivated by means of explicit signaling exchanged over the physical downlink control
channel (PDCCH). When the VoIP call transits from silent period to talk spurt, similar
PDCCH signaling is used to activate the semi-persistent resource allocation. The
semi-persistent scheduling significantly reduces the PDCCH overhead and ensures the QoS
for VoIP services by reserving resources in a semi-persistent manner. It also improves
resource utilization by dynamically activating or deactivating resource allocation between talk
spurt and silent period.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support semi-persistent scheduling.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001048 TTI Bundling
 TDLOFD-001007 High Speed Mobility

2.1.2 TDLOFD-001017 RObust Header Compression (ROHC)


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Summary
ROHC provides an efficient and flexible header compression mechanism, which is
particularly important for improving the bandwidth utilization for VoIP services with a small
payload.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Reduces the IP packet header size
 Significantly increases the ratio of the payload to header for VoIP services with a small
payload
 Shortens the response time to guarantee the high usage of links between eNodeBs and
UEs

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Description
As more and more wireless technologies are being deployed to carry IP traffic, the total
header size needs to be reduced during transmission because of large packet overhead. This
improves bandwidth resource utilization, particularly for services with a small payload (for
example, VoIP services).
On an end-to-end transmission path, the entire header information is necessary for all packets
in the flow. However, over a radio link (a portion of the end-to-end path), some data in the
information is redundant and can be reduced because they can be transparently recovered at
the receiving end.
The ROHC protocol provides an efficient, flexible, and future-proof header compression
method to compress and decompress IP, UDP, RTP, and ESP packet headers. It is designed to
operate efficiently and robustly over various link technologies with different characteristics,
especially for wireless transmission.
In an LTE system, ROHC is implemented in Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP)
entities associated with user-plane packets. In the UL, the packets are compressed by the UE
and decompressed by the eNodeB. In the DL, the packets are compressed by the eNodeB and
decompressed by the UE.
The relative gain for specific flows or applications depends on the size of the payload used in
each packet. Header compression significantly improves the bandwidth utilization for VoIP
services with a small payload.
Huawei LTE eNodeBs support profiles 0x0000 to 0x0004 based on both IPv4 and IPv6. Table
2-1 shows the profile identifiers and their associated header compression protocols.

Table 2-1 ROHC profile identifier and header compression protocol

Profile Identifier Header Compression Protocol


0x0000 No compression
0x0001 RTP, UDP, IP
0x0002 UDP, IP
0x0003 ESP, IP
0x0004 IP

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support ROHC.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

2.1.3 TDLOFD-001048 TTI Bundling


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN3.0.

Summary
When this feature is enabled, cell edge users (CEUs) with a low signal to interference plus
noise ratio (SINR) in the uplink can retransmit the same data block in continuous subframe.

Benefits
TTI bundling improves uplink coverage and indoor reception for VoIP services.

Description
The activation and deactivation of TTI bundling transmission is controlled by RRC signaling
messages.
If TTI bundling is configured at the RRC layer, TTI_BUNDLE_SIZE specifies the number of
TTIs in a TTI bundle. Within a TTI bundle, hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ)
retransmissions are non-adaptive and are performed without waiting for feedback (for
example, NACK or ACK) related to previous transmissions according to
TTI_BUNDLE_SIZE. A feedback for a TTI bundle is only received for a specific TTI
corresponding to TTI_BUNDLE_SIZE. A retransmission of a TTI bundle is also a TTI bundle.
TTI_BUNDLE_SIZE is fixed at 4. ACK is short for acknowledgement and NACK is short for
negative acknowledgement.
According to 3GPP specifications, only uplink-downlink subframe configuration types 0, 1,
and 6 support this feature.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support TTI bundling.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLBFD-00100701 uplink-downlink subframe configuration type1&2 (type 2 is not
supported)
 TDLOFD-001016 VoIP Semi-persistent Scheduling
 TDLOFD-001058 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO

2.1.4 TDLOFD-081229 Voice Characteristic Awareness Scheduling


Availability
This feature is
 Applicable to Macro from LTE TDD eRAN8.1.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

 Applicable to Micro from LTE TDD eRAN8.1.


 Applicable to LampSite from LTE TDD eRAN8.1.

Summary
This feature is implemented based on uplink delay-based dynamic scheduling and uplink
VoLTE volume estimation for dynamic scheduling. This feature adjusts scheduling priorities
and estimates uplink volume to be scheduled to improve uplink voice performance in heavy
traffic scenarios.
In heavy-traffic scenarios where data and voice services coexist, the eNodeB prioritizes SR
scheduling requests. This allows voice services to be preferentially scheduled, which ensures
the voice quality.
The independent configuration for voice inactivity timer improves user experiences on voice
services.

Benefits
This feature improves uplink voice performance in heavy traffic scenarios.

Description
 Uplink delay-based dynamic scheduling
The eNodeB prioritizes voice packets based on their waiting times; a longer waiting time
indicates a higher priority. This way, the eNodeB makes a balance among scheduling queues
and improves voice quality, especially the voice quality of UEs at the cell edge where channel
conditions are poor.
 Uplink VoLTE volume estimation for dynamic scheduling
The eNodeB estimates uplink VoLTE volume for dynamic scheduling based on the
VoLTE model and uplink scheduling intervals:
− During talk spurts, the eNodeB estimates the number of voice packets in the UE
buffer based on their uplink scheduling intervals and then calculates the volume of
voice packets based on the size of a voice packet.
− During silent periods, the eNodeB takes the size of a voice packet as the uplink
VoLTE volume for dynamic scheduling.
When a called UE does not answer the call, the calling UE is released after the UE inactivity
timer expires. In this case, the calling UE in idle mode may be reselected to a cell that does
not support voice services. If the called UE starts to answer the call, the service with QCI of 1
of the calling UE fails to be set up.
With independent configuration for voice inactivity timer, the UEs can distinguish voice and
non-voice scenarios. That is, the length of the UE inactivity timer can be independently
configured to avoid the preceding negative impact.

Enhancement
 eRAN TDD 11.0
UL Delay-based Dynamic Scheduling is enhanced in eRAN11.0. In heavy-traffic
scenarios where data and voice services coexist, the eNodeB prioritizes SR scheduling
requests. This allows voice services to be preferentially scheduled, which ensures the
voice quality.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 eCo
None
 UE
None
 Transport network
None
 CN
None
 OSS
None
 Other features
This feature applies only to VoLTE services. This feature requires the following features:
− TDLBFD-002025 Basic Scheduling
− TDLOFD-00101502 Dynamic Scheduling
 Others
None

2.1.5 TDLOFD-111202 Coverage-based VoLTE Experience


Optimization
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.

Summary
The coverage-based VoLTE experience optimization feature performs admission decision on
dedicated voice bearers based on the uplink channel quality. The eNodeB identifies UEs in
areas with weak coverage and rejects setup of their dedicated voice bearers. The IMS instructs
the UEs to retry CSFB-based calls so that voice calls can be made successfully.

Benefits
This feature improves user experience for VoLTE UEs in areas with weak coverage and
prevents Before Alerting SRVCC (bSRVCC) call drops.

Description
After this feature is enabled, the eNodeB calculates the uplink path loss (PathLoss) based on
the power headroom report (PHR) received from a NE, and measures the uplink SRS

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

reference signals to obtain the uplink SINR. Then, the eNodeB determines whether the UE is
located in an area with weak coverage based on the PathLoss and SINR. The eNodeB rejects
setup of the dedicated voice bearers for UEs in areas with weak coverage.
 When the call is a mobile originated call, the IMS sends a SIP message (SIP 500/380/503)
for the UE to trigger the CSFB procedure if setup of the dedicated voice bearer fails.
 When the call is a mobile terminated call (MTC), the IMS initiates the MTC procedure
in the GSM CS domain so that the UE triggers the CSFB procedure.
The IMS enables UEs in areas with weak coverage to trigger the CSFB procedure so that
voice calls can be made successfully.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 eCoordinator
None
 UE
The UE must be capable of initiating a CSFB-based call upon receipt of error codes such
as SIP 500/380/503.
 CN
The IMS must be capable of instructing a UE to initiate the CSFB procedure in case of a
failed voice service setup.
 Other NEs
None
 Other features
This feature requires any of the following features:
TDLOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN
TDLOFD-001053 Flash CS Fallback to GERAN
TDLOFD-081203 Ultra-Flash CSFB to GERAN
 Others
None

2.1.6 TDLOFD-111207 VoLTE Rate Control


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Summary
VoLTE Rate Control adjusts the AMR-NB/AMR-WB rate for uplink voice services depending
on the uplink channel quality and voice quality. The feature helps improve the voice quality
and LTE uplink coverage.

Benefits
This feature helps improve the voice quality and LTE uplink coverage.

Description

Figure 2-1 Before the feature is enabled

Before the feature is enabled, UEs use a fixed coding rate. As shown in Figure 2-1, a UE uses
a high voice coding rate during the access. When the UE moves to a weak coverage area, the
coding rate remains unchanged. As a result, the uplink voice coverage is restricted.

Figure 2-2 After the feature is enabled

After this feature is enabled, the eNodeB adjusts the AMR-NB/AMR-WB rate for uplink
voice services depending on the uplink channel quality and voice quality, as shown in Figure
2-2.
 When the uplink channel quality and voice quality are favorable, a high voice coding
rate is used to further improve the voice quality.
 When the uplink channel quality and voice quality are poor, a low voice coding rate is
used to improve the uplink voice coverage.

Enchancement
None

Dependency
 eNodeB
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

 eCoordinator
None
 UE
The UE supports AMR rate adjustment.
 Core network
The CN works with the SBC to support the SBC joint rate adjustment solution.
 Other NEs
None
 Other features
None
 Others
None

2.1.7 TDLOFD-001022 SRVCC to UTRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
SRVCC is a solution to provide voice services on LTE networks. During initial LTE network
deployment, when UEs running voice services move out of an LTE network, voice services
can continue in the legacy circuit switched (CS) domain by means of SRVCC, ensuring voice
service continuity.
SRVCC requires the IMS. It is used in specific scenarios on LTE networks.

Benefits
The service interruption period during a handover can be reduced to improve user experience
with voice services.

Description
To facilitate session transfer of voice services to the CS domain, the IMS multimedia
telephony sessions must be implemented on the IMS.
The procedure for SRVCC from E-UTRAN to UTRAN is as follows
1. The MME receives the handover request from the E-UTRAN with the SRVCC handling
indication. The MME then triggers the SRVCC procedure with the mobile switching
center (MSC) server enhanced for SRVCC through the Sv interface if the MME has
SRVCC STN-SR information for this UE.
2. The MSC server enhanced for SRVCC initiates session transfer to the IMS and
coordinates it with a CS handover to the target UTRAN cell.
3. The MSC server enhanced for SRVCC sends a Forward Relocation Response message to
the MME, which includes the necessary CS handover command information for the UE
to access the UTRAN cell.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

4. The MME performs the bearer splitting function to separate the voice bearer from
non-voice bearers. Then, the MME initiates a CS handover for the voice bearer to the
MSC server and initiates a packet switched (PS) handover for the non-voice bearers to
the serving GPRS support node (SGSN).
The MME may suppress the PS handover during the SRVCC procedure. A PS handover is
performed by following the inter-RAT handover procedure defined in 3GPP TS 23.401. The
MME processes the Forward Relocation Response message from the MSC server during the
SRVCC and PS-PS handover procedures.
Figure 2-3 shows the SRVCC from E-UTRAN to UTRAN.

Figure 2-3 SRVCC from E-UTRAN to UTRAN

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires IMS multimedia telephony and the TDLOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT
Mobility between E-UTRAN and UTRAN feature.
UEs must support SRVCC to UTRAN.

2.1.8 TDLOFD-001023 SRVCC to GERAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
SRVCC is a solution to provide voice services on LTE networks. During initial LTE network
deployment, when UEs running voice services move out of an LTE network, the voice
services can continue in the legacy CS domain by means of SRVCC, ensuring voice service

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

continuity. SRVCC requires the IMS. It is used in specific scenarios on LTE networks. There
are no commercial UEs which can support this feature.

Benefits
When a UE moves from E-UTRAN to GERAN, SRVCC maintains voice call continuity for
the UE.

Description
When a UE moves from E-UTRAN to GERAN, SRVCC is used to maintain voice call
continuity for the UE.
To facilitate session transfer of voice services to the CS domain, the IMS multimedia
telephony sessions must be implemented on the IMS.
The procedure for SRVCC from E-UTRAN to GERAN is as follows: The MME receives the
handover request from the E-UTRAN indicating SRVCC handling. The MME then triggers
the SRVCC procedure with the MSC server enhanced for SRVCC through the Sv interface if
the MME has SRVCC STN-SR information for this UE. The MSC server enhanced for
SRVCC initiates session transfer to the IMS and coordinates it with a CS handover to the
target GERAN cell. The MSC server enhanced for SRVCC sends a Forward Relocation
Response message to the MME, which includes the necessary CS handover command
information for the UE to access the GERAN cell.
The MME performs the bearer splitting function to separate the voice bearer from non-voice
bearers. The MME may suppress the PS handover during the SRVCC procedure. A PS
handover is performed by following the inter-RAT handover procedure defined in 3GPP TS
23.401. The MME processes the Forward Relocation Response message from the MSC server
during the SRVCC and PS-PS handover procedures.
Figure 2-4 shows the SRVCC from E-UTRAN to GERAN.

Figure 2-4 SRVCC from E-UTRAN to GERAN

Enhancement
In eRAN8.1, the eNodeB can delete inter-frequency measurements in SRVCC to GERAN
handovers.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

To facilitate the reporting of GERAN measurements and avoid call drop caused by delayed
handover, the following functions are implemented:
 If the VoIP service is active, all inter-frequency measurements are deleted when
coverage-based GERAN measurements are started.
 If the VoIP service is initiated after coverage-based GERAN measurements are started,
deleting all inter-frequency measurements is triggered.
 If it is detected that the VoIP service is active after coverage-based GERAN
measurements are started, inter-frequency measurements are prohibited.

Dependency
UEs must support SRVCC.
This feature requires IMS multimedia telephony and the TDLOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT
Mobility between E-UTRAN and GERAN feature. UEs must support SRVCC to GERAN.

2.2 CSFB
2.2.1 TDLOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Summary
E-UTRAN cannot provide CS services. When UEs camp in an area overlapped by E-UTRAN
and UTRAN coverage, this feature allows users to perform CS services.

Benefits
CS services are available for users when UEs camp in an area overlapped by E-UTRAN and
UTRAN coverage.

Description
By using legacy CS infrastructure, this feature allows users to perform voice and other CS
services (such as SMS and LCS) when UEs are served by the E-UTRAN. A
CS-fallback-capable UE connected to E-UTRAN may establish one or more CS services in
the UTRAN. This feature is available only when the E-UTRAN coverage and UTRAN
coverage overlap.
CS fallback and IMS-based services can be used simultaneously in the same operator's
network.
CS fallback to UTRAN requires the SGs interface between the MSC server and MME.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Figure 2-5 Network for CS fallback to UTRAN

The MGW is not shown in Figure 2-5 because this feature does not affect user-plane processing.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, the CS fallback function based on the UTRAN cell load in this feature
is enhanced.
eNodeBs perform CS Fallback to UTRAN based on the UTRAN cell load information, which
is shared with E-UTRAN cells by using the RAN Information Management (RIM) procedure.
Cell load information shared between a radio network controller (RNC) and an eNodeB is
used in target cell selection for CS fallback. This increases the success rate of CS fallback to
UTRAN, prevents unnecessary delay and signaling overhead, and improves user experience.

Dependency
UEs must support CSFB.
This feature requires TDLOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and
UTRAN.
CS fallback based on the UTRAN cell load requires the core network and RNC to support
RIM-based load information transfer to E-UTRAN.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001035 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT
 TDLOFD-001090 Enhanced CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT

2.2.2 TDLOFD-001052 Flash CS Fallback to UTRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.2.

Summary
Flash CS fallback to UTRAN complies with 3GPP R9 specifications.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Flash CS fallback to UTRAN can be performed when the RAN Information Management
(RIM) procedure is supported by UEs, core networks, and RANs in both LTE and UMTS
systems.
If the networks and UEs do not support 3GPP R9 specifications, flash CS fallback to UTRAN
can also be accomplished by using blind CS fallback.

Benefits
This feature decreases CS service access delay to improve user experience. The delay in flash
CS fallback to UTRAN is about 1 second shorter than CS fallback defined in 3GPP R8
specifications, and approximates the delay in UMTS calls.

Description
The RIM procedure is accomplished with the MME and the UMTS core network, which
transparently forwards the request to the target UMTS cell. Then, the target cell encapsulates
the system information and sends it back to the LTE cell.
The eNodeB can obtain system information for neighboring UMTS cells with the RIM
procedure based on 3GPP R9 specifications. The system information can be sent to the UE
during flash CS fallback so that the procedures of requesting and updating the system
information can be omitted or partially omitted. As a result, the delay is reduced during CS
fallback.
A UE can benefit from blind CS fallback regardless of whether the UE complies with 3GPP
R9 specifications. When a neighboring cell supporting blind handover has been configured for
an LTE cell, blind handover significantly decreases measurement and SI access delay.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, the following functions are enhanced:
 Enhanced blind handover
In an LTE/UMTS multimode base station, the E-UTRAN uses a different antenna system
from the UTRAN. The LTE cell edge may not be included in the UMTS cell coverage. If
the LTE frequency band is lower than the UMTS frequency band, the LTE cell coverage
is greater than the UMTS cell coverage. In this scenario, the handover success rate for
CS fallback of CEUs is low, which deteriorates user experience.
To address this issue, eRAN6.0 introduces adaptive blind handover for CS fallback.
Event A1 is used to distinguish between cell center users (CCUs) and CEUs. The
eNodeB applies blind handovers and measurement-based handovers to CCUs and CEUs,
respectively. This conserves CCU inter-RAT measurement time and increases the CSFB
success rate for CEUs.
 Enhanced redirection
As defined in 3GPP specifications, UEs do not preferentially select a target cell whose
SIBs have been delivered by the eNodeB, but instead follow general cell selection rules.
If a target cell whose SIBs have been delivered by the eNodeB is selected, UEs do not
need to obtain its SIBs after fallback. The greater the number of such cells, the higher the
probability that flash CS fallback succeeds. However, this also increases the size of
RRCConnectionRelease messages over the air interface. If the signal quality is poor,
these messages may be lost.
To enhance redirection for flash CS fallback in eRAN6.0, a parameter has been added to
specify the maximum number of GSM cells whose SIBs can be delivered by the eNodeB

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

during redirection. Operators can specify an appropriate value for this parameter based
on their network performance.

Dependency
The core network and UEs must support CSFB.
This feature requires TDLOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001035 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT
 TDLOFD-001090 Enhanced CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT

2.2.3 TDLOFD-001068 CS Fallback with LAI to UTRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN3.0.

Summary
By using the newly defined LAI IE, the eNodeB can resolve the difference between the target
RATs selected by the eNodeB and MME and the selected target cells due to the discrepancy
between the tracking area (TA) and (location area) LA. The optimized CS fallback process
prevents unnecessary location area update (LAU) procedures and reduces the CS fallback
E2E latency.
If an operator only deploys LTE networks, CS fallback depends on the UMTS network
deployed by other operators. The optimized CS fallback process prevents incorrect PLMN
selection in such a multi-PLMN scenario.

Benefits
During CS fallback from E-UTRAN to UTRAN, this feature reduces the LAU possibility, and
therefore shortens the CS fallback delay due to unnecessary LAU procedures. In multi-PLMN
scenarios, this feature prevents CS fallback failures due to PLMN updates.

Description
In the GSM/UMTS/LTE coexistence scenario, the operator selects the combined
MME/UMTS MSC attach policy when the MME receives the attach request from a
GSM/UMTS/LTE or UMTS/LTE multi-mode terminal because the MME does not recognize
the UE capability. The MME maintains the mapping relationships between the TA and LA.
The LA belongs to the attached UMTS MSC.
The MME sends the LA to the eNodeB by using the newly defined LAI IE in S1AP. When
receiving the CSFB indication and location area identity (LAI), the eNodeB can select the
proper RAT and neighboring cell.

Enhancement
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Dependency
UEs must support CS fallback.
The core network must support the LAI IE.
This feature cannot coexist with following features:
TDLOFD-001035 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT
TDLOFD-001090 Enhanced CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT

2.2.4 TDLOFD-001088 CS Fallback Steering to UTRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
Huawei eNodeBs support CS fallback steering to UTRAN based on the UE status, target RAT
priorities, target UTRAN frequency priorities, and CS fallback mechanism priorities.

Benefits
With this feature, operators who have deployed both an E-UTRAN and a UTRAN can
achieve CS fallback of UEs to a specified RAT or inter-RAT frequency based on the network
plan and load balancing requirements.

Description
CS fallback steering to UTRAN can be performed based on the following configurations:
 UE status, including idle (supporting CS only) and active (supporting CS and PS)
 Priorities of RATs, including GERAN and UTRAN
 Priorities of UTRAN frequencies, including R99 and High Speed Packet Access (HSPA)
 Priorities of CS fallback mechanisms, including PS handover, PS redirection, and flash
CS fallback
The preceding configurations can be modified.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires the following:
 TDLOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN
 TDLOFD-001078 E-UTRAN to UTRAN CS/PS Steering
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001035 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

 TDLOFD-001090 Enhanced CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT


If TDLOFD-001068 CS Fallback with LAI to UTRAN is activated, CS fallback steering to
UTRAN considers the LAI during target RAT selection.

2.2.5 TDLOFD-081223 Ultra-Flash CSFB to UTRAN


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs and LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature applies to areas where UTRAN and LTE networks are deployed and LTE
networks do not support VoIP services.
When a UE initiates a CS service setup request in an LTE cell, this feature enables the RNC to
prepare CS resources before a CS fallback through the SRVCC handover procedure. This
shortens the access delay for the CS fallback and improves user experience.

Benefits
This feature shortens the access delay for CS fallbacks by around 1 second and improves user
experience.

Description
This feature works as follows:
1. When a UE initiates a CS service setup request in an LTE cell, the eNodeB triggers an
LTE-to-UTRAN SRVCC handover.
2. Upon identifying the proprietary SRVCC-based CS fallback procedure, the CN sends the
RNC a RELOCATION REQUEST message that includes parameter indications
instructing the RNC to prepare CS resources before a CS fallback.
3. Based on the indications, the RNC prepares the required CS resources. The RNC then
performs special operations to ensure that the CS fallback succeeds.
4. After the CS fallback, the UE and CN skip the authentication and encryption procedures
required by the standard CS fallback procedure.
Figure 2-6 illustrates how this feature works.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Figure 2-6 Working principle of CSFB based on SRVCC

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 UE
UEs must support the LTE-to-UTRAN SRVCC handover procedure.
 Transport Network
None
 CN
The MME and MSC are provided by Huawei and both support this feature.
 OSS
None
 Other Features
This feature requires the following features:
− TDLOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN
 Others
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

2.2.6 TDLOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
E-UTRAN cannot provide CS services. When UEs camp in an area overlapped by E-UTRAN
and GERAN coverage, this feature allows users to perform CS services.

Benefits
CS services are available for users when UEs camp in an area overlapped by E-UTRAN and
GERAN coverage.

Description
By using legacy CS infrastructure, this feature allows users to perform voice and other CS
services (such as SMS and LCS) when UEs are served by the E-UTRAN. A
CS-fallback-capable UE connected to E-UTRAN may establish one or more CS services in
the GERAN. This feature is available only when the E-UTRAN coverage and GERAN
coverage overlap.
CS fallback and IMS-based services can be used simultaneously in the same operator's
network.
CS fallback to GERAN requires the SGs interface between the MSC server and MME.

Figure 2-7 Network for CS fallback to GERAN

The MGW is not shown in Figure 2-7 because this feature does not affect user-plane
processing.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support CS fallback.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

This feature requires TDLOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and


GERAN.
The enhancement of CS fallback to GERAN requires support for Huawei GERAN network
elements (NEs) and eCoordinator.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001035 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT
 TDLOFD-001090 Enhanced CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT

2.2.7 TDLOFD-001053 Flash CS Fallback to GERAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.2.

Summary
Flash CS fallback to GERAN complies with 3GPP R9 specifications.
Flash CS fallback to GERAN can be performed when the RIM procedure is supported by UEs,
core networks, and RANs in both LTE and GSM systems.
If the networks and UEs do not support 3GPP R9 specifications, flash CS fallback to GERAN
can also be accomplished by using blind CS fallback.

Benefits
This feature decreases CS service access delay to improve user experience. The delay in flash
CS fallback to GERAN is about 2 seconds shorter than CS fallback defined in 3GPP R8
specifications, and approximates the delay in GSM calls.

Description
The RIM procedure is accomplished with the MME and the GSM core network, which
transparently forwards the request to the target GSM cell. Then, the target cell encapsulates
the system information and sends it back to the LTE cell.
The eNodeB can obtain system information for neighboring GSM cells with the RIM
procedure based on 3GPP R9 specifications. The system information can be sent to the UE
during flash CS fallback so that the procedures of requesting and updating the system
information can be omitted or partially omitted. As a result, the delay is reduced during CS
fallback.
A UE can benefit from blind CS fallback regardless of whether the UE complies with 3GPP
R9 specifications. When a neighboring cell supporting blind handover has been configured for
an LTE cell, blind handover significantly decreases measurement and SI access delay.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, the following functions are enhanced:
 Enhanced blind handover
In an LTE/GSM multimode base station, the E-UTRAN uses a different antenna system
from the GERAN. The LTE cell edge may not be included in the GSM cell coverage. If

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

the LTE frequency band is lower than the GSM frequency band, the LTE cell coverage is
greater than the GSM cell coverage. In this scenario, the handover success rate for CS
fallback of CEUs is low, which deteriorates user experience.
To address this issue, eRAN6.0 introduces adaptive blind handover for CS fallback.
Event A1 is used to distinguish between CCUs and CEUs. The eNodeB applies blind
handovers and measurement-based handovers to CCUs and CEUs, respectively. This
conserves CCU inter-RAT measurement time and increases the CSFB success rate for
CEUs.
 Enhanced redirection
As defined in 3GPP specifications, UEs do not preferentially select a target cell whose
SIBs have been delivered by the eNodeB, but instead follow general cell selection rules.
If a target cell whose SIBs have been delivered by the eNodeB is selected, UEs do not
need to obtain its SIBs after fallback. Therefore, the greater the number of such cells, the
higher the probability that flash CS fallback succeeds. However, this also increases the
size of RRCConnectionRelease messages over the air interface. If the signal quality is
poor, these messages may be lost.
To enhance redirection for flash CS fallback in eRAN6.0, a parameter has been added to
specify the maximum number of GSM cells whose SIBs can be delivered by the eNodeB
during redirection. Operators can specify an appropriate value for this parameter based
on their network performance.

Dependency
UEs must support CS fallback.
This feature requires TDLOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001035 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT
 TDLOFD-001090 Enhanced CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT

2.2.8 TDLOFD-001069 CS Fallback with LAI to GERAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN3.0.

Summary
By using the newly defined LAI IE, the eNodeB can resolve the difference between the target
RATs selected by the eNodeB and MME and the selected target cells due to the discrepancy
between the TA and LA. The optimized CSFB process prevents unnecessary LAU procedures
and reduces the CS fallback E2E latency.
If an operator only deploys LTE networks, CS fallback depends on the GSM network
deployed by other operators. The optimized CS fallback process prevents incorrect PLMN
selection in such a multi-PLMN scenario.

Benefits
During CS fallback from E-UTRAN to GERAN, this feature reduces the LAU possibility, and
therefore shortens the CS fallback delay due to unnecessary LAU procedures. In multi-PLMN
scenarios, this feature prevents CS fallback failures due to PLMN updates.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Description
In the GSM/UMTS/LTE coexistence scenario, the operator selects the combined MME/GSM
MSC attach policy when the MME receives the attach request from a GSM/UMTS/LTE or
GSM/LTE multi-mode terminal because the MME does not recognize the UE capability. The
MME maintains the mapping relationships between the TA and LA. The LA belongs to the
attached GSM MSC.
The MME sends the LA to the eNodeB by using the newly defined LAI IE in S1AP. When
receiving the CSFB indication and LAI, the eNodeB can select the proper RAT and
neighboring cell.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support CS fallback.
The core network must support the LAI IE.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001035 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT
 TDLOFD-001090 Enhanced CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT

2.2.9 TDLOFD-001089 CS Fallback Steering to GERAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
Huawei eNodeBs support CS fallback steering to GERAN based on the UE status, target RAT
priorities, and CS fallback mechanism priorities.

Benefits
With this feature, operators who have deployed both an E-UTRAN and a GERAN can
achieve CS fallback of UEs to a specified RAT or inter-RAT frequency based on the network
plan and load balancing requirements.

Description
CS fallback steering to GERAN can be performed based on the following configurations:
 UE status, including idle (supporting CS only) and active (supporting CS and PS)
 Priorities of RATs, including GERAN and UTRAN
 Priorities of CS fallback mechanisms, including PS handover, PS redirection, cell change
order/network assisted cell change (CCO/NACC), and flash CS fallback
The preceding configurations can be modified.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires TDLOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN.
If operators require prioritization of GERAN and UTRAN frequencies for CS fallback
steering, TDLOFD-001088 CS Fallback Steering to UTRAN must be activated.
If TDLOFD-001069 CS Fallback with LAI to GERAN is activated, CS fallback steering to
GERAN considers the LAI during target RAT selection.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001035 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT
 TDLOFD-001090 Enhanced CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT

2.2.10 TDLOFD-081203 Ultra-Flash CSFB to GERAN


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs and LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.

Summary
When a UE initiates a voice service request in a VoIP-incapable E-UTRAN cell within the
overlapping area between the E-UTRAN and a GERAN, this feature triggers a single radio
voice call continuity (SRVCC) procedure to have circuit switched (CS) resources prepared in
the GERAN.

Benefits
This feature decreases the CS fallback (CSFB) delay by about 1.5s and improves user
experience.

Description
The following figure shows the procedure for ultra-flash CSFB to GERAN.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Figure 2-8 Procedure for ultra-flash CSFB to GERAN

When the core network identifies the Huawei proprietary SRVCC procedure for CSFB, it
sends the BSC a handover request message that contains CS-related parameters. As instructed
by the message, the BSC prepares CS resources.
Compared with standard CSFB procedures, this CSFB procedure does not require
authentication, ciphering, or CS bearer setup after the UE is handed over to the GERAN. As a
result, the CSFB delay decreases.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 UE
UEs must support SRVCC from E-UTRAN to GERAN.
 Transport network
None
 Core network
MMEs and MSCs must be Huawei equipment and support ultra-flash CSFB.
 OSS
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

 Other features
This feature requires the feature TDLOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN.
 Others
None

2.2.11 TDLOFD-001035 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
E-UTRAN cannot provide CS services. When UEs camp in an area overlapped by E-UTRAN
coverage and CDMA2000 1x radio transmission technology (CDMA2000 1xRTT) coverage,
CS fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT helps to provide CS services for UEs.
eNodeBs support the following functions related to CS fallback:
 Redirection-based CS fallback (Release 8)
 Transmission and reception of short messages for UEs in the LTE network without
fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT

Benefits
CS services are available for users when UEs camp in an area overlapped by E-UTRAN and
CDMA2000 1xRTT coverage.

Description
By using legacy CS infrastructure, this feature allows users to perform CS services when UEs
are served by the E-UTRAN. A CS-fallback-capable UE connected to E-UTRAN may
establish one or more CS services. This feature is available only when the E-UTRAN
coverage and UTRAN coverage overlap.
CS fallback and IMS-based services are available in the same operator's network.
CS fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT requires the S102 interface between the Circuit Switched
Fallback Interworking Solution Function for 3GPP2 1xCS (1xCS IWS) and MME.
The S102 interface provides a tunnel between the MME and the 1xCS IWS to transfer 3GPP2
1xCS signaling messages.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Figure 2-9 Network for CS fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT

The media gateway (MGW) is not shown in Figure 2-9 because this feature does not affect user-plane
processing.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The core network must support CS fallback.
The 1xCS IWS must support CS fallback and enhanced CS fallback. The 1xCS IWS may be
integrated into an NE, such as a CBSC newly deployed in the CDMA2000 1xRTT network.
UEs must support CS fallback.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN
 TDLOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN
 TDLOFD-001052 Flash CS Fallback to UTRAN
 TDLOFD-001053 Flash CS Fallback to GERAN
 TDLOFD-001068 CS Fallback with LAI to UTRAN
 TDLOFD-001069 CS Fallback with LAI to GERAN
 TDLOFD-001078 E-UTRAN to UTRAN CS/PS Steering
 TDLOFD-001088 CS Fallback Steering to UTRAN
 TDLOFD-001089 CS Fallback Steering to GERAN

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

2.2.12 TDLOFD-001090 Enhanced CS Fallback to CDMA2000


1xRTT
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
If an operator has deployed a CDMA2000 1xRTT network and an E-UTRAN, UEs in the
overlapping area preferentially camp in the E-UTRAN. However, the operator often requires
that the CDMA2000 1xRTT network and E-UTRAN provide CS and PS services for UEs,
respectively. To meet such requirements, enhanced CS fallback has been designed to ensure
that UEs are handed over to the CDMA2000 1xRTT network when initiating CS services in
the overlapping area.

Benefits
With enhanced CS fallback, UEs can be quickly handed over from the E-UTRAN to the
CDMA2000 1xRTT network to initiate or receive CS services. This quick handover improves
user experience. For example, when a UE is handed over to the CDMA2000 1xRTT network
to receive a CS service, the enhanced CS fallback procedure takes only 2 to 3 seconds, which
is faster than the normal CS fallback procedure.

Description
Enhanced CS fallback in the EPS helps to provide CS services for UEs in the E-UTRAN by
reusing legacy CS infrastructures. After enhanced CS fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT, a UE
can establish one or more CS services. This feature is only available when CDMA2000
1xRTT coverage overlaps with E-UTRAN coverage.
Enhanced CS fallback and IMS-based services are available in the same operator's network.
Enhanced CS fallback in the EPS is implemented using the S102 interface between the 1xCS
IWS and the MME. The S102 interface provides a tunnel between the MME and the 1xCS
IWS to transfer 3GPP2 1xCS signaling messages.

Figure 2-10 Network for enhanced CS fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

The MGW is not shown in Figure 2-10 because this feature does not affect user-plane processing.

During an enhanced CS fallback procedure, the eNodeB hands over the UE to the target
CDMA2000 1xRTT network to perform CS services. If the UE is performing PS services in
the E-UTRAN, the eNodeB redirects the ongoing PS services to the evolved high rate packet
data (eHRPD) network.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires TDLOFD-001035 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT and
TDLOFD-001021 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and CDMA2000.
If TDLOFD-001021 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and CDMA2000 is not
enabled, enhanced CS fallback with concurrent non-optimized PS handover cannot work and
other functions in TDLOFD-001090 Enhanced CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT are not
affected.
The CDMA2000 1xRTT network must support CS Fallback and enhanced CS fallback. NEs
on the network include the 1xCS IWS, CBSC, and CBTS.
The MME must support CS Fallback and enhanced CS fallback.
UEs must support CS Fallback and enhanced CS fallback.
If CS fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT is enabled, eNodeBs do not support CS fallback to
GERAN or CS fallback to UTRAN. If CS fallback to GERAN or UTRAN is enabled,
eNodeBs do not support CS fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN
 TDLOFD-001034 CS Fallback to GERAN
 TDLOFD-001052 Flash CS Fallback to UTRAN
 TDLOFD-001053 Flash CS Fallback to GERAN
 TDLOFD-001068 CS Fallback with LAI to UTRAN
 TDLOFD-001069 CS Fallback with LAI to GERAN
 TDLOFD-001078 E-UTRAN to UTRAN CS/PS Steering
 TDLOFD-001088 CS Fallback Steering to UTRAN
 TDLOFD-001089 CS Fallback Steering to GERAN

2.2.13 TDLOFD-001091 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT Based


on Frequency-specific Factors
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Summary
When an operator has multiple CDMA2000 1xRTT frequencies in one or multiple band
classes, this feature enables the eNodeB to transfer UEs from the E-UTRAN to the
CDMA2000 1xRTT network based on the frequency-specific factors.

Benefits
This feature balances the loads between CDMA2000 1xRTT frequencies.

Description
An operator owning multiple CDMA2000 1xRTT frequencies can specify a circuit switched
fallback (CSFB) factor for each CDMA2000 1xRTT frequency. Based on these factors, the
eNodeB determines the following:
 During CSFB, the eNodeB determines the target CDMA2000 1xRTT band class for
redirection.
 During enhanced CSFB (eCSFB), the eNodeB determines which CDMA2000 1xRTT
frequency to measure. Based on the measurement results, the eNodeB hands over UEs to
the CDMA2000 1xRTT network.
The operator can specify the CSFB factors for CDMA2000 1xRTT frequencies, based on their
respective loads. For example, an operator has two CDMA2000 1xRTT bands: 800 MHz and
2.1 GHz. Generally, frequencies on the 800 MHz band are more heavily loaded than those on
the 2.1 GHz band. To balance the loads between these two bands, the operator sets the factors
for frequencies on the 800 MHz band to smaller values than those for frequencies on the 2.1
GHz band.
The following figure illustrates another example. In this situation, CDMA2000 1xRTT
frequencies 1, 2, and 3 are assigned factors 0.7, 1, and 1, respectively. Then the number of
UEs that fall back to frequencies 1, 2, and 3 will meet the following condition:
Number of UEs in frequency 1:Number of UEs in frequency 2:Number of UEs in frequency 3
= 0.7:1:1

Figure 2-11 CSFB to CDMA2000 1xRTT based on frequency-specific factors

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires either of the following features:
 TDLOFD-001035 CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT
 TDLOFD-001090 Enhanced CS Fallback to CDMA2000 1xRTT

2.3 Increment Value Service


2.3.1 TDLOFD-001047 LoCation Services(LCS)
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
LCS provides a method to identify UE geographical location (such as longitude, latitude, and
velocity) by using radio signal measurement.

Benefits
The geographical location information can be used to offer a range of location-based
value-added services. It can be used by navigation software, or for location requirements in
emergency call/lawful interception situations. For example, for E911 services, the alarm
center can locate the emergency call originator then conduct the appropriate rescue.

Description
This feature requires the support of the Enhanced Serving Mobile Location Center (E-SMLC),
which is either an independent network element in the evolved packet core (EPC) or
integrated into the MME.
This feature uses the following positioning methods:
 Cell ID based: basic accuracy (depending on radio network density)
 Observed Time Difference Of Arrival (OTDOA): medium accuracy
 A-GPS: high accuracy
LCS is implemented mainly on the E-SMLC and UE while the eNodeB acts as a transparent
entity for messages and information measurement forwarding.
A typical LCS procedure is as follows:
1. The MME receives an LCS request for a target UE location, or the MME starts LCS
service independently.
2. The MME sends the LCS request to the E-SMLC.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

3. The E-SMLC sends additional data to the UE and checks the related measurement
information from the UE or eNodeB. The E-SMLC calculates the location information
for the target UE and forwards the information to the MME.
4. If the MME does not host the LCS, the MME will forward the location information to
the NE that hosts the LCS.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support LCS for A-GPS and OTDOA.
OTDOA requires time synchronization for the E-UTRAN.
The MME must support the (LTE Positioning Protocol A) LPPa protocol.
The E-SMLC is required.

2.3.2 TDLOFD-001092 CMAS Support


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
This feature enables eNodeBs to support the commercial mobile alert system (CMAS). When
disasters or other emergencies occur, eNodeBs will receive warning broadcast requests from
MMEs, and then promptly send warning notifications to UEs in RRC_CONNECTED and
RRC_IDLE mode using system information (SI) broadcast. This allows people to use their
mobile phones to learn about potential threats as soon as possible.

Benefits
This feature offers the following benefits:
 Helps mitigate damage by alerting people of disasters or emergencies more quickly than
other forms of communication.
 Allows operators to fulfill their social responsibilities for helping protect users from
harm, and improves the social reputation of the operators.
This feature complies with all laws and regulations where it is employed.

Description
CMAS implements the following functions:
 Supports requests for starting and stopping CMAS warning notification broadcasts.
This feature supports Write-Replace Warning messages and Kill messages defined in
3GPP S1 Application Protocol (S1AP) specifications. CMAS warning notifications can
be broadcast for a specified number of times at a specified interval.
 Manages priorities of multiple CMAS warning broadcast tasks.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

If there are multiple CMAS warning broadcast tasks, an eNodeB adjusts the priorities of
these tasks based on their individual broadcast intervals and number of broadcast times.
This ensures broadcast fairness among all tasks. The eNodeB can manage a maximum of
64 CMAS broadcast tasks simultaneously. This feature requires the support of the
E-SMLC.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support CMAS.
The MME in the EPC must support CMAS.

2.3.3 TDLOFD-081222 Dynamic Service-specific Access Control


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.

Summary
This feature performs access class (AC) control on users who initiate multimedia telephony
video or voice services, based on cell congestion and disaster states.

Benefits
In the case of disasters, users may frequently use multimedia telephony video or voice
services to contact their relatives. This consumes most of the radio resources, and as a result,
other users cannot use the disaster message board service through the PS network to obtain
the disaster-related information and evacuation advisories in real time. In addition, other users
cannot use the short message service (SMS) to contact their relatives.
This feature prohibits some users from accessing a congested cell when these users initiate
multimedia telephony video or voice services in the case of disasters. This ensures that other
users can access the disaster message board through the PS network or contact their relatives
using SMS in real time.

Description
This feature performs AC control on users who initiate multimedia telephony video or voice
services, based on cell congestion and disaster states.
The feature is triggered based on the following factors:
 Disaster state
The eNodeB determines that a disaster occurs upon receiving a primary notification of
the earthquake and tsunami warning system (ETWS) or a warning notification from the

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

commercial mobile alert system (CMAS). Reference notifications can be set using
parameters.
 Cell congestion state
The eNodeB identifies the cell congestion state based on the current flow control level of
the cell. The specific policies are as follows:
− If the condition for triggering AC control is met throughout a specific number of
consecutive measurement periods after a disaster occurs in a congested cell, the
eNodeB performs AC control on users who initiate multimedia telephony video or
voice services.
− If the cell is still in the disaster state and the cell does not meet the conditions for
canceling AC control in any measurement period after AC control is triggered, the
eNodeB gradually increases the proportion of users under AC control.
− After AC control is triggered, the eNodeB periodically checks the cells status. If the
cell is not in a disaster or congestion state for a period shorter than the threshold
period for canceling AC control, the eNodeB retains the proportion of users under
AC control and continues AC control on users who initiate multimedia telephony
video or voice services.
− After AC control is triggered, if the cell exits the disaster state or meets the
condition for canceling AC control throughout a specified number of consecutive
measurement periods, the eNodeB gradually cancels AC control on users who
initiate multimedia telephony video or voice services.

Enhancement
In eRAN11.1, the access probability factor adjustment step is configurable.

Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 UE
UEs must support AC control on multimedia telephony video or voice services defined
in 3GPP Release 9.
 Transport network
None
 Core network
None
 OSS
None
 Other features
This feature requires TDLBFD-002009 Broadcast of system information.
 Others
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

2.3.4 TDLOFD-070220 eMBMS Phase 1 based on Centralized MCE


Architecture
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN7.0.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.0.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN7.0.

Summary
Huawei evolved multimedia broadcast/multicast service (eMBMS) phase 1 supports
transmission of MBMS services based on the centralized multi-cell/multicast coordination
entity (MCE) architecture, which is defined in 3GPP Release 9.

Benefits
When operators provide unicast services and there is a large demand for services (for example,
live video of a football match) in an LTE network, eMBMS offers the following benefits:
 A stable and bandwidth-guaranteed broadcast offers a satisfactory service experience.
There is no limit on the number of UEs that receive MBMS services, because MBMS
services are broadcast using semi-static radio resource configurations and the number of
UEs served does not match the amount of resources allocated.

Either RRC_IDLE or RRC_CONNECTED UEs can receive MBMS services. There is no limit on the
number of RRC_IDLE UEs that receive MBMS services. However, the maximum number of
RRC_CONNECTED UEs that receive MBMS services is subject to the cell capacity expressed in a
number of UEs.
 The broadcast allows resources to be shared in order to deliver the services in demand. It
reduces the requirement for unicast bearer resources and lowers the risk of network
congestion. In addition, it improves user experience with existing unicast services in a
heavily loaded or even congested network.
 eMBMS reduces investment in equipment for capacity expansion and allows operators to
develop new value-added services (for example, high-definition video) in order to
increase revenue.

Description
Compared with the LTE-SAE architecture that supports unicast services, an
eMBMS-supporting LTE network architecture introduces three new network elements (NEs):
Broadcast multicast service center (BM-SC): supports service announcement, security
management, session management, transmission proxy, and data synchronization.
eMBMS gateway (MBMS GW): forwards MBMS user-plane data to the eNodeB using IP
multicast over the M1 interface and performs MBMS session control through the MME. The
MBMS GW can be deployed together with the P-GW.
MCE: provides control-plane functions, such as admission control on MBMS sessions, and
time-frequency resource allocation for Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single
Frequency Network (MBSFN) transmission by all eNodeBs in a single MBSFN area.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

In Huawei eMBMS phase 1, the MCE is deployed as a standalone physical entity. An


eCoordinator, rather than the eNodeB, provides the MCE functionality. Figure 2-12 shows the
network architecture for Huawei eMBMS phase 1.

Figure 2-12 Network architecture of Huawei eMBMS phase 1

In eRAN7.0, Huawei eMBMS phase 1 supports subframe configurations 1 and 2, and the
bandwidths supported by Huawei eMBMS phase 1 are as follows:
 Macro eNodeBs: 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz
 Micro eNodeBs: 10 MHz and 20 MHz

Enhancement
 eRAN8.0
Since LTE TDD eRAN8.0, Huawei eMBMS supports MBSFN area overlaps. A single
cell can belong to a maximum of three MBSFN areas. The support of MBSFN area
overlaps enables more flexible deployment of MBMS services, especially when some
services must be transmitted across a wide area and some other services only at hotspot
locations. For MBSFN area overlaps, Huawei eMBMS supports the following
subfunctions:
− Configuring the mapping between a single cell and multiple MBSFN areas on the
MCE
− Allocating MBSFN subframes in a centralized manner in overlapping MBSFN
areas
At the startup of an MBMS session, the MCE chooses the MBSFN area where the
session is to be delivered. If overlapping MBSFN areas exist in the target region for
session delivery, the MCE chooses the largest MBSFN area that meets the MBMS
service area requirement of the session, and then performs centralized allocation of
MBSFN subframes for cells in the chosen MBSFN area.
 eRAN11.0
− eMBMS can be implemented in RAN sharing scenarios. In scenarios of RAN
sharing with common carriers, RAN sharing with dedicated carriers, or hybrid RAN
sharing, different operators can provide their own eMBMS services in the shared
network. In the case of multi-operator core network (MOCN), eNodeBs/MCEs can
connect to each of the operators' evolved packet cores (EPCs) through a dedicated
M3/M1 interface. In this way, operators can use their own EPCs to set up and
control their specific eMBMS services. In the case of RAN sharing with common
carriers, the MCE supports the configuration of the proportion of resources
available for each operator.
− eMBMS supports the MME pool networking mode. The MCE can connect to each
MME in an MME pool through a dedicated M3 interface.
− If an MME controlling a specific MBMS session becomes faulty, the MCE
cooperates with the EPC to enable another MME in the same MME pool to control

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

the session. This mechanism ensures normal running of MBMS sessions in case of
MME failures and improves the eMBMS reliability.

Dependency
 eNodeB
The LBBPc and LMPT do not support this feature.
 eCoordinator
The eCoordinator must be deployed to provide the MCE functionality.
 Core network
This feature requires core network elements such as the BM-SC, MBMS-GW and
MBMS-supporting MMEs.
 UE
UEs must support this feature.
 Transport network
The M1, M2, and M3 interfaces must be configured for this feature.
 Other features
This feature requires TDLBFD-00300503 Synchronization with GPS or
TDLOFD-00301302 IEEE1588 V2 Clock Synchronization.
 Others
This feature requires time synchronization with the accuracy of ±1.5 µs.

2.3.4.1 TDLOFD-07022001 Multi-cell transmission in MBSFN area

Availability
This feature is
 applicable to Macro from LTEeRAN7.0
 applicable to Micro from eRAN8.0
 applicable to LampSite from eRAN7.0

Summary
This feature enables the multi-cell/multicast coordination entity (MCE) to allocate the same
radio resources to all cells within a multimedia broadcast multicast service single frequency
network (MBSFN) area and also enables the cells to use the same time-frequency resources to
transmit the same multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS) sessions.

Benefits
This feature ensures synchronization of radio resources configurations between the cells
within an MBSFN area and the continuous coverage of evolved MBMS (eMBMS) services
within the MBSFN area, reducing interference between the cells within the MBSFN area.

Description
All cells within an MBSFN area use the same radio resources and modulation and coding
scheme (MCS) to transmit the same MBMS sessions. If MBMS user data is synchronized, the

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

MCE sends MBMS Scheduling Information messages to eNodeBs to ensure synchronization


of MBSFN subframes allocated to the cells, increasing MBSFN gains.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The dependency of this feature is the same as that of TDLOFD-070220 eMBMS Phase 1
based on Centralized MCE Architecture.

2.3.4.2 TDLOFD-07022002 Mixed transmission of unicast and broadcast

Availability
This feature is
 applicable to Macro from LTEeRAN7.0
 applicable to Micro from eRAN8.0
 applicable to LampSite from eRAN7.0

Summary
This feature supports mixed transmission of broadcast and unicast services in cells based on
time division multiplexing.

Benefits
This feature maximizes radio resource usage in cells within a multimedia broadcast multicast
service single frequency network (MBSFN) area based on the dynamic MBSFN subframe
allocation. MBSFN subframes can be dynamically allocated based on the multimedia
broadcast multicast service (MBMS) session requirements.

Description
Broadcast and unicast services can be transmitted in the same radio frame based on time
division multiplexing. As shown in Figure 2-13, MBSFN subframes transmit broadcast
services and normal subframes transmit unicast services.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Figure 2-13 MBSFN subframes

In an LTE FDD system, a maximum of six subframes in one radio frame can be configured as
MBSFN subframes for eMBMS. In an LTE TDD system, if uplink-downlink subframe
configuration 5 is used, a maximum of five subframes in one radio frame can be configured as
MBSFN subframes for eMBMS. In Huawei eMBMS solution, MBSFN subframes are
dynamically configured to meet MBMS session requirements. As a result, a radio frame
consists of both MBSFN subframes and normal subframes.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

2.3.4.3 TDLOFD-07022003 Data synchronization

Availability
This feature is
 applicable to Macro from LTE TDD eRAN7.0
 applicable to Micro from LTE TDD eRAN8.0
 applicable to LampSite from LTE TDD eRAN7.0

Summary
Multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS) user data is synchronized in compliance
with the SYNC protocol.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Benefits
This feature complies with 3GPP specifications and is fundamental to eMBMS.

Description
MBSFN transmission from multiple cells requires not only frequency and phase
synchronization but also MBMS user data synchronization between the cells. Data
synchronization is stipulated in the SYNC protocol. For details, see 3GPP TS 25.446.
A SYNC protocol data unit (PDU) consists of different fields, depending on the PDU type.
Among the fields, the timestamp and packet number are included in SYNC PDUs of all types.
The timestamp helps ensure that cells in MBSFN transmission send the same MBMS session
at the same time. The packet number is used to detect packet loss, check the packet sequence,
and rearrange SYNC PDUs if the received PDUs are out of sequence. Huawei eMBMS
solution supports SYNC PDUs of types 0, 1 and 3.
Data synchronization requires that the eNodeB and broadcast multicast service center
(BM-SC) be configured with the same synchronization period, synchronization start time, and
synchronization end time. The synchronization period is an integer multiple of 1024 radio
frames and must be less than 10 minutes. In the eNodeB, the integer multiple of 1024 radio
frames is specified by the eNodeB-level parameter SyncPeriod in the MBMSPara MO. This
parameter is set to 58 by default, which represents a synchronization period of 593920 ms.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The dependency of this feature is the same as that of TDLOFD-070220 eMBMS Phase 1
based on Centralized MCE Architecture.

2.3.4.4 TDLOFD-07022004 Session admission control

Availability
This feature is
 applicable to Macro from LTE TDD eRAN7.0
 applicable to Micro from LTE TDD eRAN8.0
 applicable to LampSite from LTE TDD eRAN7.0

Summary
The multi-cell/multicast coordination entity (MCE) performs admission control on
multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS) sessions initiated by the MME.

Benefits
This feature protects the network against congestion or even collapse caused by excessive
eMBMS sessions while maximizing the radio resource usage for eMBMS services and
maintaining the optimum quality of service (QoS) satisfaction rate of eMBMS services.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Description
Cells within a multimedia broadcast multicast service single frequency network (MBSFN)
area are configured with the same radio resources, and the MCE performs admission control
on MBMS sessions in the cells.
The MME initiates an MBMS session by sending an MBMS Session Start Request message
to the MCE that controls the eNodeBs in the targeted MBMS service area. The message
contains information elements (IEs) MBMS Service Area and MBMS E-RAB QoS
parameters. The MCE performs admission control the MBMS session based on the IEs.
If the available MBSFN subframes are insufficient for the MBMS session in all MBSFN areas
under the MBMS service area, the MCE rejects the MBMS session request.
If the available MBSFN subframes in one MBSFN area supports the MBMS session, the
MCE accepts the MBMS session request. However, only the available MBSFN subframes in
this MBSFN area are used to transmit the MBMS session. The MBSFN subframes in the
other MBSFN areas are used to transmit the MBMS session only when the MBSFN
subframes in these MBSFN areas are sufficient for the MBMS session transmission.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

2.3.5 TDLOFD-080210 eMBMS Service Continuity


Availability
This feature is
 Applicable to macro and LampSite eNodeBs from LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Not applicable to micro eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature is an enhancement to the evolved multimedia broadcast/multicast service
(eMBMS) feature for service continuity according to 3GPP Release 11. When this feature is
activated, UEs can identify MBMS services transmitted at different frequencies in an
inter-frequency networking scenario. Based on the information provided by a UE about the
MBMS service that the UE is interested in, the network formulates an appropriate frequency
camping policy for the UE. Based on this policy, the UE can switch to the right frequency for
reception of the desired MBMS service.

Benefits
This feature improves user experience with MBMS services.

Description
The serving cell of a UE broadcasts all the E-UTRA absolute radio frequency channel
numbers (EARFCNs) and MBMS service area IDs (SAIs) used on the current network. After

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

receiving the information, a UE identifies the target frequency used to transmit the MBMS
service that the UE is interested in. If in idle mode, the UE directly switches to the target
frequency by cell reselection to receive the desired MBMS service. If in connected mode, the
UE informs the serving eNodeB about the target frequency at which its desired MBMS
service is transmitted, and the eNodeB determines whether to immediately hand over the UE
to the target frequency.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 UE
UEs must comply with 3GPP Release 11.
 Other features
This feature requires TDLOFD-070220 eMBMS Phase 1 based on Centralized MCE
Architecture.

2.4 Video Service Optimization


2.4.1 TDLOFD-111205 Busy-Hour Download Rate Control
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.

Summary
This feature restricts the data rates of downloading services during busy hours.

Benefits
This feature reduces the resource consumption of downloading services and spares air
interface resources for high-priority services.

Description
Downloading services are identified through the core network or the service awareness device
of a third-party. The identified results are labeled on the differentiated services code points
(DSCPs) of service packets. The eNodeB identifies these DSCPs and performs differentiated
scheduling based on preset QoS configurations such as priority and service maximum bit rate
(SMBR). When the data rates of downloading services exceed the configured SMBR, the
eNodeB lowers the scheduling priority of downloading services to decrease the resources
occupied by such services.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 UE
None
 Transport network
None
 Core network
None
 OSS
None
 Others
A service awareness device is required.

2.4.2 TDLOFD-111206 Video Service Rate Adaption


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.

Summary
This feature is applicable to initial video acceleration and service rate guarantee.

Benefits
 Reduced video waiting time, which improves user experience in opening a video
 Guaranteed video playing rate, which avoids video play suspension

Description
Video services are identified through the core network or the service awareness device of a
third-party. The identified results are labeled on the differentiated services code points
(DSCPs) of service packets. The eNodeB identifies these DSCPs and performs differentiated
scheduling based on preset QoS configurations such as priority, service guaranteed bit rate
(SGBR), and segment acceleration policy.
When the data rates of video services are lower than the configured SGBR during video
playback, the eNodeB raises the scheduling priority of video services. If the data rates satisfy
the SGBR requirements, the eNodeB does not adjust the scheduling priority.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

If the segment acceleration policy is configured, a higher priority and a higher SGBR rate are
adopted to guarantee video services during the initial phase for video services to increase the
initial video download rate. The initial phase for video services is configurable.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 UE
None
 Transport network
None
 Core network
None
 OSS
None
 Others
A service awareness device is required.

2.4.3 TDLOFD-110225 Uplink Data Compression


Availability
This feature is:
Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.
Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.
Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.

Summary
When the uplink data compression (UDC) feature is enabled, a UDC-capable UE only sends
seldom-repeated data among raw data on an uplink channel over the air interface. This feature
reduces the amount of uplink data over the air interface and increases the amount of
application layer data that can be transmitted using a given amount of air interface resources,
improving the uplink application layer transmission rate.

Benefits
With a given transmission quality of air interface channels and physical resource block (PRB)
usage over the air interface, this feature considerably improves the uplink application layer
transmission rate.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 2 Voice & Other Services

Description
A UE compresses the original user plane data packets to be sent, buffers the data to be sent for
the first time, and instructs the eNodeB to buffer the same data. Afterwards, the UE filters out
the repeated data that is already buffered, from the raw data to be sent over the air interface in
the uplink. Repeated data includes HTTP GET, TCP ACK, and TCP/UDP/IP packet headers.
As a replacement of this data after buffering, new information is added to the UDC header for
transmission, including the repeated data storage indication, decompression indication,
location of repeated data in the buffer, and location of repeated data in the complete data
packets after decompression. After receiving data packets from the UE, the eNodeB
decompresses the packets based on the information in the UDC header to retrieve the
complete packets.
The UDC algorithm can be used for data streams transmitted in acknowledged mode (AM) on
the Radio Link Control (RLC) layer.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 eNodeB
This feature can be used on macro, micro, and LampSite eNodeBs. The BBP model can
not be LBBPc.
 eCoordinator
None
 Core network
None
 UE
The feature requires support from UEs.
 Transport network
None
 Other features
None
 Others
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

3 Radio & Performance

3.1 2-layer Mutil-Antenna


3.1.1 TDLOFD-001001 DL 2x2 MIMO
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
Huawei LTE TDD eRAN1.0 supports DL 2x2 multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO),
2-antenna transmit diversity, and adaptive MIMO schemes between UEs and eNodeBs,
improving system downlink performance.

Benefits
This feature significantly improves downlink system throughput and coverage performance
and also provides good user experience by offering higher data rates.

Description
The downlink 2x2 MIMO is critical to the LTE outperforming the legacy system. Both space
diversity and spatial multiplexing are supported as defined in LTE specifications. Huawei
eNodeBs support two DL 2x2 MIMO modes:
 Transmit diversity
 Open-loop spatial multiplexing
If two transmit antennas are configured for the eNodeB, the eNodeB adaptively selects one of
the two modes based on the UE rate and downlink channel quality.
Transmit diversity is a solution to mitigate signal fading and interference. By providing
several signal branches that present independently varying signal levels, the robustness of the
radio link creates a low probability that all signal copies are simultaneously in deep fading.
Spatial multiplexing is a technique to transmit independent and separately encoded data
signals, known as streams, from each of the transmit antennas that results in the space
dimension being reused, or multiplexed. If the transmitter is equipped with Ntx antennas and
the receiver has Nrx antennas, the maximum spatial multiplexing order is Ns = min (Ntx, Nrx).

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

If the spatial channels are independent of each other (that is, Ns different data streams are
transmitted over several independent spatial channels), it leads to an Ns increase of the
spectrum efficiency or capacity.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The eNodeB must be configured with two transmit channels and two antennas per sector, and
the UE must be configured with a minimum of two antennas for receiving.

3.1.2 TDLOFD-001030 Support of UE Category 2/3/4


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Summary
An eNodeB must obtain the signaled UE radio access capability parameters when configuring
and scheduling the UE. There are five categories defined in the protocol. When this feature is
enabled, eNodeBs support UE categories 2, 3, and 4.

Benefits
eNodeBs support UE categories 2, 3, and 4.

Description

Table 3-1 Downlink physical layer parameter values in the ue-Category field

UE Category Maximum Maximum Total Number Maximum


Number of Number of of Soft Number of
DL-SCH Bits of a Channel Bits Supported
Transport DL-SCH Layers for DL
Block Bits Transport Spatial
Received Block Multiplexing
Within a TTI Received
Within a TTI

Category 1 10296 10296 250368 1


Category 2 51024 51024 1237248 2
Category 3 102048 75376 1237248 2
Category 4 150752 75376 1827072 2
Category 5 299552 149776 3667200 4

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Table 3-2 Uplink physical layer parameter values in the ue-Category field

UE Category Maximum Number of Bits of an UL-SCH Support for UL


Transport Block Transmitted Within a 64QAM
TTI

Category 1 5160 No
Category 2 25456 No
Category 3 51024 No
Category 4 51024 No
Category 5 75376 Yes

Table 3-3 Total layer-2 buffer sizes in the ue-Category field

UE Category Total Layer-2 Buffer Size (Kbytes)


Category 1 150
Category 2 700
Category 3 1400
Category 4 1900
Category 5 3500

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support the same category as eNodeBs.

3.1.3 TDLOFD-001049 Single Streaming Beamforming


Availability
This feature is
 Applicable to macro eNodeBs from LTE TDD eRAN2.1.
 Not applicable to LampSite eNodeBs.
 Not applicable to micro eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature provides good user experience by offering higher data rates.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
This feature can significantly improve the system throughput (especially for CEUs) and
coverage performance in the uplink and downlink.

Description
The classical technique of using an antenna array for transmitting energy in the direction of
the intended receiver falls into the category of improving SINR. Beamforming achieves
increased SINR by adjusting the phase of signals transmitted on different antennas with the
aim of making the signals add-up constructively on the receiver. Huawei LTE TDD eRAN2.1
provides support on DL 8x2 and DL 4x2 Beamforming.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The eNodeB must be configured with a minimum of four antennas for transmission.
This feature cannot be used in the LampSite solution.
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
UEs must support transmission mode 7 (TM7) for single streaming beamforming, which is
defined in 3GPP Release 8 specifications.
This feature does not work when the eNodeB bandwidth is 5 MHz.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001031 Extended CP
 TDLOFD-001007 High Speed Mobility

3.1.4 TDLOFD-001061 Dual Streaming Beamforming


Availability
This feature is
 Applicable to macro eNodeBs from LTE TDD eRAN2.1.
 Not applicable to LampSite eNodeBs.
 Not applicable to micro eNodeBs.

Summary
In LTE TDD eRAN2.2, the eNodeB supports dual-stream beamforming for 3GPP Release 9
compliant UEs. In dual-stream beamforming mode, two data streams are transmitted on the
same OFDM time-frequency resource. The eNodeB adaptively selects single- or dual-stream
beamforming based on UE capabilities and channel conditions to increase downlink
throughput.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
This feature significantly increases downlink throughput and improves user experience.

Description
3GPP Release 9 specifications define TM8, a new beamforming transmission mode, that
supports dual-stream beamforming. In dual-stream beamforming mode, two different and
independently coded data streams are separately transmitted from two logical antenna ports.
Either of the two data streams is generated by four or eight antennas in beamforming
transmission mode. The two data streams both form directional beams towards the target UE,
which increases the SINR. Dual-stream beamforming incorporates both spatial multiplexing
and beamforming during downlink transmission. This helps provide partial multiplexing gains,
diversity gains, and array gains.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The eNodeB must be configured with a minimum of four antennas for transmission.
UEs must be configured with a minimum of two antennas for receiving and must support
TM8 for dual stream beamforming, which is defined in 3GPP Release 9 specifications.
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
This feature requires TDLOFD-001049 Single Streaming Beamforming.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001031 Extended CP
 TDLOFD-001007 High Speed Mobility
This feature cannot be used in the LampSite solution.
This feature does not work when the eNodeB bandwidth is 5 MHz.

3.1.5 TDLOFD-001077 MU-Beamforming


Availability
This feature is
 Applicable to macro eNodeBs from LTE TDD eRAN3.0.
 Not applicable to LampSite eNodeBs.
 Not applicable to micro eNodeBs.

Summary
In LTE TDD eRAN3.0, eNodeBs support 3GPP Release 9-compliant TM8. In TM8, two
DM-RS sequences are orthogonal with each other and are transmitted separately over antenna
ports 7 and 8. When these DM-RS sequences are allocated to two UEs, one sequence is
transmitted over antenna port 7 for one UE and the other sequence over antenna port 8 for the

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

other UE. In this situation, two data streams are transmitted separately to two UEs using the
same OFDM time-frequency resources. The eNodeB determines the UEs for pairing based on
UE pairing conditions, thereby increasing the downlink throughput.
In LTE TDD eRAN8.1, the following UEs can be paired for MU beamforming:
 UE using antenna port 7 in TM8 + UE using antenna port 8 in TM8
 UE in TM7 + UE in TM9
When both of the paired UEs support TM8 or TM9, one of the UEs uses antenna port 7 to
receive orthogonal DM-RS sequences and the other UE uses antenna port 8 to receive the
sequences. When two UEs in TM7 are paired, both of these UEs receive DM-RSs over
antenna port 5. When one UE in TM7 is paired with another UE in TM8 or TM9, the UE in
TM7 receives DM-RSs over antenna port 5 and the other UE over antenna port 7 or 8. In this
situation, two data streams are transmitted separately to two UEs using the same OFDM
time-frequency resources. The eNodeB determines UEs for pairing based on UE pairing
conditions.

Benefits
This feature increases the downlink throughput and improves user experience.

Description
TM8 has been introduced since 3GPP Release 9, which enables eNodeBs to support
dual-stream beamforming. In TM8, two independently encoded data streams are transmitted
over different antenna ports after being scrambled using two orthogonal DM-RS sequences.
When two UEs in TM8 work in single-stream beamforming mode, each UE uses one antenna
port. When these two UEs meet UE pairing conditions, the eNodeB generates two orthogonal
beams based on the zero forcing principles, and then pairs these two UEs. MU beamforming
increases the spectral efficiency in the downlink by using spatial multiplexing.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN8.1, the following UEs can be paired for MU beamforming:
 UE using antenna port 7 in TM8 + UE using antenna port 8 in TM8
 UE in TM7 + UE in TM9
When both of the paired UEs support TM8 or TM9, one of the UEs uses antenna port 7 to
receive orthogonal DM-RS sequences and the other UE uses antenna port 8 to receive the
sequences. When two UEs in TM7 are paired, both of these UEs receive DM-RSs over
antenna port 5. When one UE in TM7 is paired with another UE in TM8 or TM9, the UE in
TM7 receives DM-RSs over antenna port 5 and the other UE over antenna port 7 or 8. In this
situation, two data streams are transmitted separately to two UEs using the same OFDM
time-frequency resources. The eNodeB determines UEs for pairing based on UE pairing
conditions.

Dependency
The eNodeB must have at least four transmit antennas.
This feature requires TDLOFD-001049 Single Streaming Beamforming.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

To use adaptation between single-stream beamforming and dual-stream beamforming, the UE


must support TM7, TM8, or TM9.
This feature cannot be used when the channel bandwidth is 5 MHz.
This feature does not work with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001031 Extended CP
 TDLOFD-001007 High Speed Mobility
This feature does not apply to LampSite eNodeBs or BTS3205E. The LBBPc does not
support this feature.

3.1.6 TDLOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna Receive Diversity


Availability
This feature is
 Applicable to macro eNodeBs from LTE TDD eRAN2.1.
 Not applicable to LampSite eNodeBs.
 Not applicable to micro eNodeBs.

Summary
Receive diversity is a common type of multiple-antenna technology to improve signal
reception and to mitigate signal fading and interference. It improves network capacity and
data rates. In addition to UL 2-antenna receive diversity, Huawei eNodeBs also support
4-antenna receive diversity.

Benefits
This feature improves uplink coverage and throughput.

Description
Receive diversity is a technique to mitigate signal fading and interference. Multiple
frequencies may be monitored from the same signal source or the same frequency may be
monitored from multiple antennas.
Receive diversity is a way to enhance uplink channel reception, including the PUSCH,
physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), physical random access channel (PRACH), and
sounding reference signal (SRS).
Huawei eNodeBs can work with or without RX diversity. In RX diversity mode, Huawei
eNodeBs in LTE TDD eRAN2.1 can be configured with 4 antennas (4-way) by setting the
antenna magnitude in addition to UL 2-antenna receive diversity.

Enhancement
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Dependency
This feature requires eNodeBs to provide enough RF channels and demodulation resources to
match the number of diversity antennas.
This feature cannot be used in the LampSite solution.
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
This feature does not work when the bandwidth of the eNodeB equipped with the LBBPc is 5
MHz.

3.1.7 TDLOFD-001058 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN2.2.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature allows a maximum of two UEs to share the same time-frequency resource.

Benefits
This feature increases cell throughput in the uplink.

Description
When an eNodeB is equipped with four receive antennas, it can use uplink 2x4 MU-MIMO to
improve uplink performance.
The eNodeB can adaptively switch between uplink 2x4 MU-MIMO and uplink 4-antenna
receive diversity. If the uplink CQI of a UE is high or the orthogonality between the uplink
channels of this UE and other UEs is high, the eNodeB uses uplink 2x4 MU-MIMO to
improve uplink performance; otherwise, the eNodeB uses 4-antenna receive diversity.
This feature can be used only with the PUSCH.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN8.1, this feature enables the eNodeB to select UEs that can achieve the
highest throughput for pairing. In addition, enhanced MU-MIMO allows the eNodeB to
schedule UEs with high SINRs and UEs with low SINRs at different ends of the frequency
band to reduce interference between them. The eNodeB allocates the same time-frequency
resource to paired UEs.
The following functions are introduced in LTE TDD eRAN11.0:
 MCS index decrease and RB number increase for UEs with a small amount of data,
increasing the UE pairing probability

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

 MU-MIMO for VoLTE UEs, increasing the UE pairing probability and the VoLTE UE
capacity

Dependency
The eNodeB must provide four receive antennas in each cell.
This feature requires the following features:
 TDLOFD-001015 Enhanced Scheduling
 TDLOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna Receive Diversity
 TDLOFD-001094 Control Channel IRC
When the LBBPc is used, this feature is not compatible with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001075 SFN
 TDLOFD-002008 Adaptive SFN/SDMA
 TDLOFD-001098 Inter-BBP SFN
 TDLOFD-001080 Inter-BBU SFN
 TDLOFD-001081 Inter-BBP Adaptive SFN/SDMA
 TDLOFD-001082 Inter-BBU Adaptive SFN/SDMA

3.1.8 TDLOFD-001062 UL 8-Antenna Receive Diversity


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN2.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
Receive diversity is a common type of multiple-antenna technology to improve signal
reception and to mitigate signal fading and interference. It improves network capacity and
data rates. In addition to UL 2-antenna and UL 4-antenna receive diversity, Huawei eNodeBs
also support 8-antenna receive diversity.

Benefits
This feature improves uplink coverage and throughput.

Description
Receive diversity is a technique to mitigate signal fading and interference. Multiple
frequencies may be monitored from the same signal source or the same frequency may be
monitored from multiple antennas.
Receive diversity is a way to enhance uplink channel reception, including the PUSCH,
physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), physical random access channel (PRACH), and
sounding reference signal (SRS).

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Huawei eNodeBs can work with or without RX diversity. In RX diversity mode, Huawei
eNodeBs in LTE TDD eRAN2.1 can be configured with 8 antennas (8-way) through the
antenna magnitude in addition to UL 2-antenna and 4-antenna receive diversity.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires eNodeBs to provide enough RF channels and demodulation resources to
match the number of diversity antennas.
This feature requires TDLOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna Receive Diversity.
This feature cannot be used in the LampSite solution.
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
This feature does not work when the eNodeB bandwidth is 5 MHz.

3.1.9 TDLOFD-081205 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO


Availability
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature allows a maximum of two UEs to share the same time-frequency resource.

Benefits
This feature increases cell throughput in the uplink.

Description
When an eNodeB is equipped with eight receive antennas, it can use uplink 2x8 MU-MIMO.
The eNodeB can adaptively switch between uplink 2x8 MU-MIMO and uplink 8-antenna
receive diversity. If the uplink CQI of a UE is high or the orthogonality between the uplink
channels of this UE and other UEs is high, the eNodeB uses uplink 2x8 MU-MIMO to
improve uplink performance; otherwise, the eNodeB uses 8-antenna receive diversity.
This feature can be used only with the PUSCH.
This feature allows the eNodeB to select UEs that can achieve the highest throughput for
pairing.

Enhancement
The following functions are introduced in LTE TDD eRAN11.0:

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

 MCS index decrease and RB number increase for UEs with a small amount of data,
increasing the UE pairing probability
 MU-MIMO for VoLTE UEs, increasing the UE pairing probability and the VoLTE UE
capacity

Dependency
The eNodeB must provide eight receive antennas in each cell.
This feature requires the following features:
 TDLOFD-001015 Enhanced Scheduling
 TDLOFD-001062 UL 8-Antenna Receive Diversity
 TDLOFD-001094 Control Channel IRC
When the LBBPc is used, this feature is not compatible with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001075 SFN
 TDLOFD-002008 Adaptive SFN/SDMA
 TDLOFD-001098 Inter-BBP SFN
 TDLOFD-001080 Inter-BBU SFN
 TDLOFD-001081 Inter-BBP Adaptive SFN/SDMA
 TDLOFD-001082 Inter-BBU Adaptive SFN/SDMA

3.2 Interference Handling


3.2.1 TDLOFD-001012 UL Interference Rejection Combining
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
In addition to DL and UL inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC), Huawei LTE TDD
eRAN1.0 provides interference rejection combining (IRC) to effectively mitigate inter-cell
interference.

Benefits
This feature improves system performance in the presence of interference. Therefore,
enhanced network coverage and better service quality are provided for CEUs.

Description
IRC is a receive-antenna combining technique to effectively mitigate inter-cell interference.
IRC is often used together with receive diversity. In theory, IRC can be used for MIMO
decoding, and it is particularly effective for colored interference.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

The main advantage of IRC is that it can outperform maximum ratio combining (MRC) in
terms of signal demodulation in the presence of interference or congestion.

Enhancement
In eRAN7.0, SmartIRC is additionally available in 8R scenarios. This enhancement takes
effect for 8R RRU and 4R COMP scenarios.
Compared with the original IRC feature that enables eNodeBs to check for interference, this
enhancement enables the eNodeBs to additionally identify the number of equivalent
interference sources. This increases the precision of interference estimations and improves the
interference rejection performance.

Dependency
eNodeBs must be configured with two or more receive antennas.
In 4R COMP scenario, SmartIRC needs the hardware type of serving cell and collaborative
cell to be same.

3.2.2 TDLOFD-060201 Adaptive Inter-Cell Interference


Coordination
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN6.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
Adaptive ICIC determines whether to enable ICIC in an area based on inter-cell interference
and cell load, and automatically configures edge band modes and optimizes ICIC working
modes and edge band modes based on load changes.
With adaptive ICIC, eNodeBs independently report cell information to the ECO6910, and
then the ECO6910 uses the reported information to configure and optimize ICIC working
modes and edge band modes. This feature implements frequency reuse and effective inter-cell
interference control.

Huawei ECO6910, whose network element (NE) type is eCoordinator, serves as a coordinator on a radio
network and provides a platform for implementing adaptive ICIC.

Benefits
This feature offers the following benefits:
 Reduces inter-cell interference and improves CEU throughput in intra-frequency
networking mode.
 Simplifies ICIC configuration for operators to reduce operation and maintenance (O&M)
costs.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Description
Users can create ICIC optimization tasks on the eCoordinator to perform LTE TDD adaptive
ICIC optimization.
This feature provides the following functions:
 Manages ICIC optimization tasks.
Users can add, delete, modify, or query ICIC optimization tasks. When adding an
optimization task, users need to select an optimization range for cells and set
optimization parameters and policies. Then, users can modify parameters, policies, and
the optimization range for the optimization task.
Users can start an ICIC optimization task based on the preset optimization range,
parameters, and policies. After users stop an ICIC optimization task, ICIC optimization
for the cells within the optimization range is also stopped.
Only one optimization task can be started for each cell. The optimization ranges for
different tasks cannot overlap.
The eCoordinator can automatically perform slow self-optimization and reconfigure the
edge band mode based on the load data that is periodically collected.
After adaptive ICIC is enabled, the edge band mode is automatically configured. Users
cannot manually configure the mode.
 Manages ICIC optimization suggestions.
Once an optimization task has been performed, the eCoordinator provides optimization
suggestions consisting of edge band mode assignments that comply with the
optimization range.
Users can choose automatic or manual delivery of optimization suggestions. In automatic
delivery mode, the eCoordinator automatically delivers the optimization suggestions to
eNodeBs. In manual delivery mode, the eCoordinator delivers the optimization
suggestions to eNodeBs only after users has confirmed them.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The ECO6910 must be deployed.
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
This feature cannot be used with TDLBFD-002022 Static ICIC.

3.2.3 TDLOFD-001094 Control Channel IRC


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
This feature prevents the PUCCH from being affected by inter-cell interference.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
This feature enhances interference resistance for uplink control channels and improves control
channel coverage.

Description
IRC combines signals on the PUCCH received by multiple antennas. Compared with MRC,
IRC performs better on colored interference mitigation.
eNodeBs support adaptive switching between IRC and MRC for PUCCHs. When there is
colored interference, eNodeBs select IRC. In other cases, eNodeBs select MRC.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires one of the following features:
 TDLBFD-00202001 UL 2-Antenna Receive Diversity
 TDLOFD-001005 UL 4-Antenna Receive Diversity
 TDLOFD-001062 UL 8-Antenna Receive Diversity
eNodeBs must be configured with two or more receive antennas and the LBBPc is not used.

3.2.4 TDLOFD-001075 SFN


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN3.0.
 Not applicable to Micro.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
This feature combines multiple common cells in one single frequency network (SFN) cell. It
can also reduce the number of handovers between cells.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 This feature reduces interference at the cell edge in a densely populated area.
 The number of handovers decreases.

Description
An SFN cell is a combination of multiple common cells, which use the same cell ID and
apply joint time-frequency resource scheduling. SFN converts inter-cell interference into the

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

time-frequency resources scheduled inside the SFN cell, and increases the proportion of UEs
with a high SINR in the entire RAN.
In this feature, an eNodeB allows multiple RRUs to serve an SFN cell. In the downlink, joint
scheduling is used and all RRUs transmit the same signals except the physical downlink
shared channels (PDSCHs) of beamforming users and UE-specific reference signals.
In the uplink, joint scheduling is used at the physical and Media Access Control (MAC) layers.
According to the measurement reports of a UE at the physical layer, the MAC layer selects
the serving RRU with the best channel quality for the UE. The physical layer processes all UE
signals and reports only the serving RRU physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) and
physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) of the UE to the MAC layer.

Enhancement
In eRAN3.1, eNodeBs supported multi-user beamforming and UL CoMP in SFN cells, and
allowed a maximum of seven cells to be combined into an SFN cell.
In eRAN6.0, eNodeBs can work in 2T2R mode only in the LampSite solution.
In LTE TDD eRAN7.0, this enhancement enables eNodeBs to selectively receive physical
uplink shared channel (PUSCH) data at the Media Access Control (MAC) layer. When
multiple working RRUs receive PUSCH data from a UE, they demodulate and then transmit
the received PUSCH data to the MAC layer. At the MAC layer, the eNodeB combines the
optimal PUSCH data, increasing uplink coverage.
In LTE TDD eRAN8.1, eNodeBs support outdoor 8T8R SFN mode, and outdoor 4T4R and
8T8R hybrid SFN mode.

Dependency
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLBFD-002022 Static Inter-Cell Interference Coordination
 SEFD-033100 Adaptive Inter-Cell Interference Coordination – LTE
 TDLOFD-001031 Extended CP
 TDLOFD-001039 RF Channel Intelligent Shutdown
 TDLAOFD-003002 Intra-eNodeB DL CoMP in Adaptive Mode
This feature does not work when the eNodeB bandwidth is 5 MHz or 15 MHz.
When the LBBPc is configured, this feature cannot be used with TDLOFD-001058 UL 2x4
MU-MIMO or TDLOFD-081205 UL 2*8 MU-MIMO.
 For Macro eNodeB:
A macro eNodeB must be configured with a minimum of four antennas for transmission and
reception.
 For LampSite eNodeB:
Selective reception of data at the MAC layer is not supported in eRAN7.0.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

3.2.5 TDLOFD-002008 Adaptive SFN/SDMA


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN3.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
After multiple common cells are combined into one SFN cell, the eNodeB categorizes UEs
based on signal quality and adaptively performs joint scheduling or independent scheduling at
time-frequency resources of multiple cells. Space Division Multiple Access (SDMA) is
applied in the process of independently scheduling time-frequency resources of multiple cells.

Benefits
Adaptive SFN/SDMA increases the resource usage and the system throughput when
guaranteeing the cell coverage quality.

Description
Based on the uplink reference signal receive power (RSRP), the eNodeB judges the UE
attribute and then performs one of the following operations:
 Jointly scheduling the resources of all cells
 Jointly scheduling the resources of part of cells
 Independently scheduling the resources of a single cell
In addition, the eNodeB determines a list of working RRUs. The PDSCHs and PUSCHs of all
cells served by the involved RRUs will be jointly or independently scheduled.

Enhancement
In eRAN7.0, this feature enables eNodeBs to selectively receive PUSCH data at the MAC
layer upon uplink transmission. When multiple working RRUs receive PUSCH data from a
UE, they demodulate and then transmit the received PUSCH data to the MAC layer. At the
MAC layer, the eNodeB combines the correctly demodulated PUSCH data, increasing uplink
coverage.
In LTE TDD eRAN8.1, eNodeBs support the outdoor 8T8R SFN mode, outdoor 4T4R and
8T8R hybrid SFN mode.
In LTE TDD eRAN11.0, 8T8R or 4T4R SFN cells support inter-RRU coordinated
beamforming.

Dependency
This feature depends on TDLOFD-001075 SFN.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

3.2.6 TDLOFD-001098 Inter-BBP SFN


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN3.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
RRUs serving the same SFN cell can be connected to different BBPs in the same BBU
subrack so that the time-frequency resources of multiple physical cells can be jointly
scheduled.

Benefits
This feature extends the application range of SFN.

Description
RRUs serving multiple cells can interact with each other by connecting to different BBPs,
which extends the application range of SFN.
In LTE TDD eRAN3.1, multiple RRUs can be connected to different BBPs in the same BBU
subrack on the macro network. They serve the same SFN cell and implement joint
transmission and reception in the SFN cell.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, only the LampSite solution uses 2T2R.
In the LampSite solution, multiple pRRUs can be connected to different LBBPs in the same
BBU subrack. They serve the same SFN cell and implement joint transmission and reception
in the SFN cell.
In eRAN7.0, this feature enables eNodeBs to selectively receive PUSCH data at the MAC
layer upon uplink transmission. When multiple working RRUs receive PUSCH data from a
UE, they demodulate and then transmit the received PUSCH data to the MAC layer. At the
MAC layer, the eNodeB combines the correctly demodulated PUSCH data, increasing uplink
coverage.
In eRAN8.1, the eNodeB supports the outdoor 8T8R SFN mode and the outdoor 4T4R and
8T8R hybrid SFN mode.

Dependency
This feature depends on TDLOFD-001075 SFN.
This feature does not work with the following features:
 TDLBFD-00100701 Uplink-Downlink Subframe Configuration Type 1&2 (Not Support
Type 2)

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

If the LBBPc is used, this feature does not work with TDLOFD-001058 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO
or TDLOFD-081205 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO. The eNodeB does not support SFN using 8T8R.
In the LampSite solution, this feature depends on the following features:
 TDLOFD-001132 Intra-BBU Baseband Sharing (2T)
 TDLOFD-001076 CPRI Compression

3.2.7 TDLOFD-001080 Inter-BBU SFN


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN3.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
RRUs serving the same SFN cell can be connected to different BBUs so that the
time-frequency resources of multiple physical cells can be jointly scheduled.

Benefits
This feature extends the application range of SFN. If one RRU of the SFN cell is replaced, the
physical connections of the RRU do not need to be adjusted.

Description
RRUs serving multiple cells communicate with each other through BBU interconnection,
which extends the application range of SFN.
In eRAN3.1, the troubleshooting mechanism will aggravate the impact of a fault. For example,
if the primary LBBP is faulty, or if a communication link on the primary or secondary BBU is
faulty, the RRU is disconnected from the BBU.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, this feature can be enabled if one RRU of the SFN cell is running
properly, regardless of whether the RRU is connected to the primary BBU or the secondary
BBU.
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, the troubleshooting mechanism is optimized. RRUs connected to the
secondary BBU can be bound to a standby cell in an inter-BBU SFN cell. If the secondary
BBU is faulty, the bound standby cell is automatically activated. The RRUs connected to the
secondary BBU can continue transmitting data. If RRUs are not bound to a standby cell, the
troubleshooting mechanism is the same as that of LTE TDD eRAN3.1.
In eRAN7.0, this feature enables eNodeBs to selectively receive PUSCH data at the MAC
layer upon uplink transmission. When multiple working RRUs receive PUSCH data from a
UE, they demodulate and then transmit the received PUSCH data to the MAC layer. At the
MAC layer, the eNodeB combines the correctly demodulated PUSCH data, increasing uplink
coverage.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

In LTE TDD eRAN8.1, the eNodeB supports the outdoor 8T8R SFN mode and the outdoor
4T4R and 8T8R hybrid SFN mode.

Dependency
This feature depends on the following features and inherits the corresponding mutual
exclusive relationships:
 TDLOFD-001075 SFN
 TDLOFD-001098 Inter-BBP SFN
If the LBBPc is used, this feature does not work with TDLOFD-001058 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO
or TDLOFD-081205 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO.
The USU3900 or USU3910 is required for BBU interconnection.

3.2.8 TDLOFD-001081 Inter-BBP Adaptive SFN/SDMA


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN3.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
RRUs serving the same SFN cell can be connected to BBPs in the same BBU subrack so that
the time-frequency resources of multiple physical cells can be jointly or independently
scheduled.

Benefits
This feature extends the application range of adaptive SFN/SDMA.

Description
Inter-BBP connection implements data interaction between multiple cells, and extends the
application range of adaptive SFN/SDMA.
On the macro network, multiple RRUs are connected to different BBPs in the same BBU
subrack and serve the same SFN cell. In an SFN cell, the eNodeB adaptively selects joint
transmission or reception and SDMA.

Enhancement
In the LampSite solution, multiple pRRUs are connected to different BBPs in the same BBU
subrack and serve the same SFN cell. In an SFN cell, the eNodeB adaptively selects joint
transmission or reception and SDMA.
In eRAN7.0, this feature enables eNodeBs to selectively receive PUSCH data at the MAC
layer upon uplink transmission. When multiple working RRUs receive PUSCH data from a
UE, they demodulate and then transmit the received PUSCH data to the MAC layer. At the

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

MAC layer, the eNodeB combines the correctly demodulated PUSCH data, increasing uplink
coverage.
In LTE TDD eRAN8.1, eNodeBs support the outdoor 8T8R SFN mode, outdoor 4T4R and
8T8R hybrid SFN mode.
In LTE TDD eRAN11.0, 8T8R or 4T4R SFN cells support inter-RRU coordinated
beamforming.

Dependency
This feature depends on the following features and inherits the corresponding mutual
exclusive relationships:
 TDLOFD-001075 SFN
 TDLOFD-002008 Adaptive SFN/SDMA
 TDLOFD-001098 Inter-BBP SFN
If the LBBPc is used, this feature does not work with TDLOFD-001058 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO
or TDLOFD-081205 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO.
In the LampSite solution, this feature depends on TDLOFD-001076 CPRI Compression.

3.2.9 TDLOFD-001082 Inter-BBU Adaptive SFN/SDMA


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN3.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
RRUs serving the same SFN cell are connected to different BBUs so that the time-frequency
resources of multiple physical cells can be jointly scheduled.

Benefits
This feature extends the application range of SFN/SDMA. If one RRU of the SFN cell is
replaced, the physical connections of the RRU do not need to be adjusted.

Description
RRUs serving multiple cells communicate with each other through BBU interconnection,
which extends the application range of SFN and SDMA.
In LTE TDD eRAN3.1, this feature can be enabled only when at least one of the RRUs
connected to the primary BBU is functioning properly. An RRU is functioning properly when
the following conditions are met:
 The RRU is not blocked.
 The LBBP connected to the RRU is functioning properly.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

In eRAN7.0, this feature enables eNodeBs to selectively receive PUSCH data at the MAC
layer upon uplink transmission. When multiple working RRUs receive PUSCH data from a
UE, they demodulate and then transmit the received PUSCH data to the MAC layer. At the
MAC layer, the eNodeB combines the correctly demodulated PUSCH data, increasing uplink
coverage.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, this feature can be enabled if one RRU of the SFN cell is running
properly, regardless of whether the RRU is connected to the primary BBU or the secondary
BBU.
In LTE TDD eRAN8.1, eNodeBs support the outdoor 8T8R SFN mode, outdoor 4T4R and
8T8R hybrid SFN mode.
In LTE TDD eRAN11.0, 8T8R or 4T4R SFN cells support inter-RRU coordinated
beamforming.

Dependency
This feature depends on the following feature:
 TDLOFD-001075 SFN
 TDLOFD-002008 Adaptive SFN/SDMA
 TDLOFD-001098 Inter-BBP SFN
 TDLOFD-001080 Inter-BBU SFN
 TDLOFD-001081 Inter-BBP SFN/SDMA
If the LBBPc is used, this feature does not work with TDLOFD-001058 UL 2x4 MU-MIMO
or TDLOFD-081205 UL 2x8 MU-MIMO.
The USU3900 or USU3910 is required for BBU interconnection.

3.2.10 TDLOFD-070227 PDCCH DCS in SFN


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs and LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN7.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.

Summary
In SFN scenarios, this feature enables the eNodeB to allocate power only to the working RRU,
protecting the PDCCHs in neighboring cells against the impact of non-working RRUs.

Benefits
This feature increases the PDCCH capacity and coverage in SFN scenarios.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Description
This feature is implemented as follows: 1. Based on the strength of uplink signals received by
each RRU, the eNodeB estimates the downlink signal strength of each RRU, which refers to
the equivalent strength of signals sent from each RRU to a UE. 2. The eNodeB selects the
RRUs, of which the estimated signal strength is large, as working RRUs for the UE, and adds
them to the working RRU list.
3. The eNodeB allocates both power and CCE resources to working RRUs and allocates only
CCE resources to non-working RRUs. This allocation mechanism reduces interference to the
PDCCHs in neighboring cells and does not affect signals received by the UE.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires TDLOFD-002008Adaptive SFN/SDMA.
This feature cannot be used with the feature TDLOFD-081221 PDCCH SDMA in SFN.

3.2.11 TDLOFD-081221 PDCCH SDMA in SFN


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs and LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature is introduced to solve the PDCCH capacity problem of SFN cells. By
implementing the SDMA between RRUs of PDCCH in an SFN cell, this feature increases the
number of UEs that can be scheduled in each transmission time interval (TTI) in the PDCCH
load congestion scenario. It is recommended that this feature be enabled when the PDCCH
load of an SFN cell is heavy.

Benefits
This feature increases the PDCCH capacity in SFN scenarios.

Description
Based on the uplink RSSI of each RRU, the eNodeB estimates the downlink RSSI of each
RRU, which refers to the equivalent strength indicator of signals sent from each RRU to a UE.
Then, the eNodeB selects the RRU with a greater estimated RSSI as a working RRU for the
UE PDCCH.
The PDCCH allocated to the UE occupies only the control channel element (CCE) resources
of RRUs in the RRU working set of the UE. CCE resources corresponding to other RRUs can
be allocated to other UEs. This mechanism increases the CCE resource usage of PDCCHs in
an SFN cell and the PDCCH capacity.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature depends on TDLOFD-002008 Adaptive SFN/SDMA.
This feature depends on TDLOFD-070227 PDCCH DCS in SFN.

3.2.12 TDLOFD-070223 Multi-Cell Interference Randomizing and


Coordination
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN7.0.

Summary
When the network is lightly loaded, this feature enables the eCoordinator to allocate different
frequency-domain resources to UEs in different cells and to optimize the UE power
configurations. In this way, co-channel interference between cells is reduced.

Benefits
This feature offers the following benefits:
 Increases the spectral efficiency, proportion of high-order MCSs, handover success rate,
and service rate experienced by users.
 Decreases the service drop rate.

Description
This feature is implemented on the eCoordinator.
The eCoordinator obtains information about cells (including intra- and inter-eNodeB cells) to
determine the start position of the RBGs that are allocated to the UEs in each cell. Therefore,
the UEs in different cells are allocated different resources and therefore inter-cell interference
are reduced. In addition, the eCoordinator optimizes the UE power configurations to further
reduce inter-cell interference. In this way, the signal quality is improved.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires the eCoordinator.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

3.2.13 TDLOFD-080203 Coordinated Scheduling based Power


Control
Availability
This feature is
 applicable to Macro from LTE TDD eRAN8.0
 not applicable to Micro
 not applicable to LampSite

Summary
Based on coordinated scheduling, Coordinated Scheduling based Power Control (CSPC)
dynamically configures downlink transmit power for each subframe in each cell within an
area for inter-cell interference coordination.

Benefits
In an E-UTRAN, physical resource block (PRB) usage increases with the traffic volume. UEs
experience severe interference in densely populated urban areas where intra-frequency
eNodeBs are deployed with an inter-site distance of less than 500 m.
CSPC efficiently coordinates inter-cell interference and offers the following benefits:
 Increases hotspot cell capacity in a load-unbalanced network.
 Increases the throughput of cell edge UEs across the network.
 Reduces handover failures and service drops caused by DL interference.

Description
CSPC coordinates TTI-specific transmit power configurations in individual cells. It reduces
inter-cell interference based on collaboration of scheduling with power control.
During CSPC, the centralized controller periodically collects UE scheduling information
about each E-UTRAN cell, calculates the optimal cell power configurations for the entire
network, and delivers the results to the E-UTRAN NodeBs (eNodeBs). The eNodeBs then
change their DL power to the received power configurations. Each cell obtains the transmit
power configurations for the local cell and its neighboring cells on the same time-frequency
resources and promptly updates the modulation and coding schemes (MCSs) for cell edge
UEs. In addition, if a UE experiences interference from neighboring cells, the serving cell
schedules the UE on the time-frequency resources where the neighboring cells reduce
transmit power. This type of scheduling increases spectral efficiency of the UE.
Figure 3-1 shows an example of time-domain power coordination. In this example, cell 1 and
cell 2 are neighboring cells. To meet their respective scheduling requirements, the cells
coordinate the transmit power for resource elements (REs) that carry data on the physical
downlink shared channel (PDSCH) within each TTI. In the figure, a blue rectangle denotes an
RE with full transmit power, a yellow rectangle denotes an RE with increased transmit power,
and a gray rectangle denotes an RE with decreased transmit power.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Figure 3-1 Example of time-domain power coordination

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 eNodeB
This feature is dependent on the Cloud BB architecture.

3.2.14 TDLOFD-081217 Interference Detection and Suppression


Availability
Co-channel and adjacent-channel interference detection and identification is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
Atmospheric duct remote interference suppression is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Summary
An eNodeB detects whether its cells are subject to interference. If they are subject to
interference, the eNodeB uses the channel interference detection algorithm to identify
co-channel and adjacent-channel interference, and reports the result to the U2000. The result
can be used as reference for network planning and optimization for operators.
When atmospheric duct remote interference occurs, the eNodeB uses the enhanced uplink
demodulation algorithm, enhanced uplink power control policy, and more conservative
scheduling policy to ensure stable scheduling for access signaling and minimize the impact of
interference on system performance.

Benefits
The eNodeB automatically detects co-channel and adjacent-channel interference and
identifies interference caused by LTE TDD system out-of-synchronization, improving
interference detection efficiency.
When atmospheric duct remote interference occurs, the eNodeB uses the stable scheduling
policy and enhanced uplink demodulation algorithm to minimize the impact of interference on
system performance, improving network KPIs.

Description
The eNodeB detects the received signal power on the UpPTS and on each resource block (RB)
in common uplink subframes in the current cell to determine whether the cell is subject to
interference. If it is subject to interference, the eNodeB analyzes the spectrum roll-off
characteristics to identify co-channel and adjacent-channel interference, and reports the result
to the U2000. The result can be used as reference for network planning and optimization for
operators.
When the eNodeB detects that the interference to uplink subframes exceeds a specified
threshold, atmospheric duct remote interference suppression enables the eNodeB to:
 Correct the channel estimation result to improve uplink demodulation performance.
 Automatically increase the uplink transmit power for UEs that initially access the
network to enhance the anti-interference capability of access signaling.
 Use the conservative scheduling policy for access signaling sent after MSG3 to ensure
stable scheduling of access signaling.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN11.1, the atmospheric duct remote interference suppression function has
been added.

Dependency
None

3.2.15 TDLOFD-081219 Interference Based Uplink Power Control


Availability
This feature is:

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.


 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.

Summary
Cells exchange interference information with each other. The eNodeB controls the uplink
transmit power of UEs in the local cell that generates strong interference on neighboring cells
based on the obtained inter-cell interference.

Benefits
The feature helps increase the data rate and access success rate of cell edge UEs.

Description
When this feature is disabled, the eNodeB performs uplink power control based on the
available uplink resources and UE number in the local cell without considering interference
from UEs in the local cell on its neighboring cells. As a result, the interference from the local
cell to neighboring cells may be strong, and the data rate of cell edge UEs is low.
When this feature is enabled, the eNodeB performs uplink power control with the
consideration of interference from the local cell on its neighboring cells. If the interference
from the local cell on its neighboring cells is strong, the eNodeB lowers the transmit power of
UEs in the local cell that generates strong interference on neighboring cells, thereby
increasing the data rate and access success rate of cell edge UEs in neighboring cells. If the
interference from the local cell on its neighboring cells is weak, the eNodeB performs uplink
power control on UEs in the local cell based on the available uplink resources and UE number
in the local cell.

Enhancement
None

Prerequisite and Mutually Exclusive Features


 X2 interfaces must be configured between eNodeBs.
 The InnerLoopPuschSwitch option must be selected.

3.2.16 TDLOFD-081232 Enhanced Uplink Power Control


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature provides the following functions:

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

 Enabling fast PUCCH power control


The PUCCH power convergence can be accelerated based on the PUCCH group power
control and the accelerated PUCCH power control command generation.
 Setting the type of UEs to which optimized closed-loop PUSCH power control in
dynamic scheduling mode applies
This function decreases interference on neighboring cells caused by the enabling of
optimized closed-loop PUSCH power control in dynamic scheduling mode.

Benefits
This feature increases downlink cell throughput by accelerating PUCCH power control
convergence, decreases interference on neighboring cells caused by the enabling of optimized
closed-loop PUSCH power control in dynamic scheduling mode, and increases uplink
throughput as well as the access success rate when optimized closed-loop PUSCH power
control in dynamic scheduling mode is enabled.

Description
With this feature enabled, the eNodeB generates multiple PUCCH power control commands
after receiving one feedback over the PUCCH from a UE, and then sends the PUCCH power
control commands to the UE based on PUCCH group power control. In this way, fast PUCCH
power control convergence is achieved.
With this feature enabled, configuring the type of UEs to which optimized closed-loop
PUSCH power control in dynamic scheduling mode applies can decrease interference on
neighboring cells caused by the enabling of optimized closed-loop PUSCH power control in
dynamic scheduling mode.

Enhancement
N/A

Dependency
This feature depends on the following features:
 TDLBFD-081104 PUCCH Outer Loop Power Control
 TDLBFD-002026 Uplink Power Control

3.2.17 TDLOFD-110205 Intra-eNodeB Uplink Coordinated


Scheduling
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Summary
Intra-eNodeB uplink coordinated scheduling measures and estimates the actual interference
arising during data transmissions based on scheduling information exchange between
intra-eNodeB cells, thereby improving the accuracy of modulation and coding scheme (MCS)
selection.

Benefits
This feature improves the accuracy of MCS selection and therefore increases the uplink
throughput of UEs at the cell edge and certain UEs in the cell center.

Description
Intra-eNodeB uplink coordinated scheduling is an enhancement of basic AMC. Based on
scheduling information exchange between the serving cell and coordinating cells, this feature
can identify in advance UEs with interference during data transmissions and measure and
estimate channel quality again for data transmissions. This feature uses multi-cell coordinated
measurement based on scheduling information exchange to accurately predict the interference
source during UE data transmissions. In the case of time-varying interference, this feature can
better trace interference changes and improve the accuracy of SINR prediction and MCS
selection, thereby increasing the system throughput.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature depends on the following features:
 TDLBFD-001006 AMC
 TDLBFD-002025 Basic Scheduling

3.2.18 TDLOFD-110206 Inter-eNodeB Uplink Coordinated


Scheduling
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
In the case of multi-BBU interconnection, inter-eNodeB uplink coordinated scheduling
measures and estimates the actual interference arising during data transmissions based on
scheduling information exchange between inter-eNodeB cells, thereby improving the
accuracy of MCS selection.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
This feature improves the accuracy of MCS selection and therefore increases the uplink
throughput of UEs at the cell edge and certain UEs in the cell center.
Compared with inter-eNodeB uplink coordinated scheduling, inter-eNodeB uplink
coordinated scheduling allows for coordinating cells served by different BBUs and adjusts the
coordination scope, further improving the uplink throughput.

Description
Inter-eNodeB uplink coordinated scheduling can coordinate adaptive modulation and coding
for cells served by different BBUs. When the serving cell and coordinating cells are
configured on different BBUs, USUs must be used for interconnecting BBUs to implement
scheduling information exchange between these cells. Except for this difference,
inter-eNodeB uplink coordinated scheduling has the same functions as inter-eNodeB uplink
coordinated scheduling.
When both inter-eNodeB uplink coordinated scheduling and inter-eNodeB uplink coordinated
scheduling are enabled, uplink coordinated scheduling can be implemented in the same BBU
or between BBUs.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature depends on the following features:
 TDLBFD-001006 AMC
 TDLBFD-002025 Basic Scheduling
 TDLOFD-110205 Intra-eNodeB Uplink Coordinated Scheduling

3.2.19 TDLOFD-111208 Uplink Interference Coordination


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature enables an eNodeB to jointly schedule radio resources in multiple cells to
coordinate uplink interference. It reduces uplink coverage shrinkage caused by increased
noise and interference in medium- and heavy-load scenarios.

Benefits
This feature improves uplink coverage of cells in medium- and heavy-load scenarios.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Description
This feature applies to one or more intra-frequency cell clusters. Cells in each cluster report
interference information and UE scheduling information to the centralized controller, and the
centralized scheduler allocates appropriate time-frequency resources to UEs based on the
signal quality requirements of UEs to mitigate interference. In this way, uplink coverage of
cells improves in medium- and heavy-load scenarios.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 eNodeB
This feature is implemented in Cloud BB (USU3900 and USU3910) or IP RAN
scenarios.
 UE
None
 Transport network
In IP RAN scenarios, the transmission bandwidth of a cell must be 5 Mbit/s or higher,
and the unidirectional transmission delay must be less than 2 ms.
 Core network
None
 OSS
None
 Other features
This feature does not work with the following features:
TDLOFD-001031 Extended CP
TDLOFD-001007 High Speed Mobility
 Others
None

3.2.20 TDLOFD-111201 Remote Interference Adaptive Avoidance


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
When an eNodeB detects remote interference caused by an atmospheric duct, it sends and
detects characteristic sequences to achieve automatic interference avoidance and reduce
interference to remote eNodeBs. After remote interference disappears, the eNodeB

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

automatically recovers the normal sending mode to reduce the negative impact of interference
avoidance on system performance.

Benefits
When remote interference is generated due to an atmospheric duct, the eNodeB automatically
rolls back the special subframe configuration from 9:3:2/10:2:2 to 3:9:2 over the air interface
to extend the guard period (GP) and reduce interference to remote eNodeBs.
The eNodeB sends and detects characteristic sequences to determine that interference is
generated within the system, helping identify remote interference caused by an atmospheric
duct.
Characteristic sequences are used to detect the eNodeB ID of an interference source cell,
helping determine the interference source.

Description
Due to atmospheric duct reciprocity, downlink signals of an eNodeB subject to remote
interference caused by an atmospheric duct interfere with the uplink transmission of a remote
eNodeB. When the eNodeB detects remote interference, it periodically sends characteristic
sequences in the DwPTS and checks characteristic sequences in the UpPTS and uplink
subframes. When characteristic sequences are detected during several consecutive periods, the
eNodeB automatically rolls back the special subframe configuration to 3:9:2 over the air
interface and stops transmissions in the DwPTS to reduce interference to the remote eNodeB
and further determines the eNodeB ID of the interference source cell based on the
characteristic sequences. If no characteristic sequence is detected during several consecutive
periods, the eNodeB automatically restores the special subframe configuration to 9:3:2/10:2:2
to reduce the negative impact of interference avoidance on system performance.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 eNodeB
This feature does not apply to LampSite or micro eNodeBs.
 UE
None
 Transport network
None
 Core network
None
 OSS
None
 Other features
This feature requires the following features:
− TDLOFD-00102604 uplink-downlink special subframe configuration type 6
− TDLBFD-00100702 uplink-downlink special subframe configuration type 7
This feature does not work with any of the following features:

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

− TDLOFD-001031 Extended CP
− TDLOFD-002008 Adaptive SFN/SDMA
− TDLOFD-001098 Inter-BBP SFN
− TDLOFD-001080 Inter-BBU SFN
− TDLOFD-001081 Inter-BBP Adaptive SFN/SDMA
− TDLOFD-001082 Inter-BBU Adaptive SFN/SDMA
 Others
None

3.2.21 TDLOFD-001066 Intra-eNodeB UL CoMP


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN3.0.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.

Summary
Uplink Coordinated Multipoint Reception (UL CoMP) implements signal combining and
interference mitigation in multiple cells.
Phase I of this feature is applicable only in intra-BBU intra-BBP cells. Phase II of this feature
is applicable also in intra-BBU inter-BBP cells.

Benefits
This feature increases the uplink throughput of not only cell edge users (CEUs) but also some
cell center users (CCUs) in intra-BBU intra- or inter-BBP cells. In addition, this feature
improves the performance of UL CoMP UEs.

Description
This feature can be used in two scenarios.
In scenario 1, signal combining gains are expected. To provide such gains, this feature uses
the antennas of multiple cells (each with multiple receive antennas) to receive PUSCH signals
from a UE. This UE, also called a type-1 UE, is at the edge of the serving cell and close to the
coordinating cell.
In scenarios 2, interference mitigation gains are expected. To provide such gains, this feature
utilizes a type-1 UE's signals to reduce its interference with a UE in the coordinating cell. This
UE, also called a type-2 UE, shares some physical resource blocks (PRBs) with the type-1
UE.

Enhancement
 In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, this feature can be used in 4R cells, that is, cells with four
receive antennas.
 In LTE TDD eRAN7.0, this feature can be used in 4R cells and based on smart IRC.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

 In LTE TDD eRAN8.1, this feature can be used in 8R cells.


 In LTE TDD eRAN11.0:
− This feature can be used in SFN cells, macro cells.
− This feature can preferentially select VoIP users for UL CoMP.
− This feature can be deployed on the LBBPd that supports six cells or the UBBPd
with one chip supporting six cells.
− The eNodeB can automatically adjust the reporting interval of UL CoMP A3
measurement reports and disable UL CoMP when the main control board's CPU is
flow controlled. The two functions reduce resource consumption for UL CoMP
when the network is heavily loaded.
− This feature can be used in three cells when this feature's switch and the 3-cell UL
CoMP switch are both turned on.
When this feature uses the antennas of three cells to receive signals from a UE, it
provides higher gains than the function that uses the antennas of one or two cells to
receive signals from a UE. Figure 3-2 compares 2-cell UL CoMP (left) and 3-cell
UE CoMP (right).

Figure 3-2 2-cell UL CoMP (left) and 3-cell UE CoMP (right)

Dependency
 eNodeB
This feature requires that cells have two, four, or eight receive antennas. To support 4R
or 8R cells, the BBP model must be LBBPd, UBBPd, or UBBPe.
This feature requires that the system bandwidth be not 5 MHz.
This feature requires that the distance between the RRU and BBU be less than 20 km.
 eCoordinator
None
 UE
None
 Transport network
None
 Core network
None
 OSS

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

None
 Other features
− This feature requires TDLOFD-001012 UL Interference Rejection Combining.
− Phase II of this feature requires Phase I of this feature.
− Enhanced 4R UL CoMP requires smart IRC.
 Others
None

3.2.22 TDLOFD-081207 UL CoMP based on Coordinated BBU


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature, together with TDLOFD-001066 Intra-eNodeB UL CoMP, implements joint
reception in intra- or inter-BBU cells in multi-BBU interconnection scenarios.

Benefits
This feature increases the uplink throughput of cell edge users (CCEs) and some cell center
users (CCUs) in intra- or inter-BBU cells.
Inter-BBU UL CoMP increases the proportion of UL CoMP UEs and improves the
performance of these UEs, compared with intra-BBU UL CoMP.

Description
This feature can use the antennas of inter-BBU cells to receive signals from a UE. The serving
cell and coordinating cells are set up in different BBUs and need to exchange information
through universal switching units (USUs).
This feature is applicable in the following scenarios:
 Inter-BBU UL CoMP in cells served by RRUs installed on different poles or towers

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Figure 3-3 Inter-BBU UL CoMP

 Inter-BBU UL CoMP in cells served by RRUs installed on the same pole or tower
In the preceding scenarios, the RRUs are connected to BBPs in different BBUs, and the BBUs
are connected through USUs. This feature supports a maximum of two levels of USUs.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN11.0:
 This feature can be used in SFN cells, macro cells.
 This feature can preferentially select VoIP users for UL CoMP.
 This feature can be deployed on the LBBPd that supports six cells or the UBBPd with
one chip supporting six cells.
 The eNodeB can automatically adjust the reporting interval of UL CoMP A3
measurement reports and disable UL CoMP when the main control board's CPU is flow
controlled. The two functions reduce resource consumption for UL CoMP when the
network is heavily loaded.
 This feature can be used in three cells when this feature's switch and the 3-cell UL CoMP
switch are both turned on.
When this feature uses the antennas of three cells to receive signals from a UE, it
provides higher gains than the function that uses the antennas of one or two cells to
receive signals from a UE. Figure 3-4 compares 2-cell UL CoMP (left) and 3-cell UE
CoMP (right).

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Figure 3-4 2-cell UL CoMP (left) and 3-cell UE CoMP (right)

Dependency
 eNodeB
The eNodeB can be a macro, micro (BTS3205E), or LampSite eNodeB.
The BBU can be a BBU3900 or BBU3910.
The BBP model can be LBBPd, UBBPd, or UBBPe.
The cells selected for UL CoMP must meet the following conditions:
− If the cells are geographically adjacent inter-BBU cells, they must be configured
with intra-frequency handover relationships and their physical cell identifiers (PCIs)
must be different.
− If the cells are inter-BBU cells, they must have different eNodeB IDs.
− The cells must have the same frequency, bandwidth, cyclic prefix (CP) type, and
receive mode (4R or 8R).
 eCoordinator
None
 UE
None
 Transport network
None
 Core network
None
 OSS
None
 Other features
− TDLOFD-001012 UL Interference Rejection Combining
− TDLOFD-001066 Intra-eNodeB UL CoMP
 Others
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

3.3 QoS
3.3.1 TDLOFD-001026 Optional uplink-downlink subframe
configuration
3.3.1.1 TDLOFD-00102601 uplink-downlink subframe configuration type 0

Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN3.1.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN6.1.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
eNodeBs support different uplink-downlink subframe configurations.

Benefits
This feature allows operators to flexibly configure the uplink-downlink subframe ratio based
on different service requirements.

Description
eNodeBs support different uplink-downlink subframe configurations specified in 3GPP TS
36.211.
Type 0: The ratio of uplink subframe to downlink subframe is 3:1. When this configuration is
used, the throughput of uplink traffic is larger than downlink traffic, such as in video
surveillance.
Table 3-4 shows uplink-downlink subframe configuration type 0.

Table 3-4 Uplink-downlink subframe configuration type 0


Uplink-d Downlin Subframe Number
ownlink k-to-Upl
configur ink 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ation Switch-p
oint
periodici
ty
0 5 ms D S U U U D S U U U

In the preceding figure, D denotes the subframe reserved for downlink transmissions, U
denotes the subframe reserved for uplink transmissions, and S denotes a special subframe that
consists of the downlink pilot timeslot (DwPTS), guard period (GP), and uplink pilot timeslot
(UpPTS).

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependencies
This feature cannot coexist with following features: TDLOFD-001077 MU-Beamforming

3.3.1.2 TDLOFD-00102602 uplink-downlink special subframe configuration


type 4

Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN1.0.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN6.1.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
eNodeBs support different special subframe configurations (DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS
lengths).

Benefits
This feature allows operators to flexibly configure special subframe configurations according
to application scenarios, such as a different cell radius.

Description
eNodeBs support different special subframe configurations (DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS lengths)
specified in 3GPP TS 36.211.
Type 4: The length ratio of DwPTS to GP to UpPTS is 12:1:1 when eNodeBs use normal
cyclic prefix (CP). The length ratio of DwPTS to GP to UpPTS is 3:7:1 when eNodeBs use
extended CP.
Table 3-5 and Table 3-6 list special subframe configuration type 4.

Table 3-5 Special subframe configuration type 4 (normal CP)


Special Subframe Normal CP
Configuration
DwPTS GP UpPTS
4 26336Ts 2192Ts 2192Ts

Table 3-6 Special subframe configuration type 4 (extended CP)


Special Subframe Extended CP

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Configuration DwPTS GP UpPTS


4 7680Ts 17920Ts 2560Ts

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

3.3.1.3 TDLOFD-00102603 uplink-downlink special subframe configuration


type 5

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Summary
eNodeBs support different special subframe configurations (DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS
lengths).

Benefits
This feature allows operators to flexibly configure special subframe configurations according
to application scenarios, such as a different cell radius.

Description
eNodeBs support different special subframe configurations (DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS lengths)
specified in 3GPP TS 36.211.
Type 5: The length ratio of DwPTS to GP to UpPTS is 3:9:2 when eNodeBs use normal CP.
The length ratio of DwPTS to GP to UpPTS is 8:2:2 when eNodeBs use extended CP.
Table 3-7 and Table 3-8 list special subframe configuration type 5.

Table 3-7 Special subframe configuration type 5 (normal CP)


Special Subframe Normal CP
Configuration
DwPTS GP UpPTS
5 6592Ts 19744Ts 4384Ts

Table 3-8 Special subframe configuration type 5 (extended CP)


Special Subframe Extended CP

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Configuration DwPTS GP UpPTS


5 20480Ts 5120Ts 5120Ts

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

3.3.1.4 TDLOFD-00102604 uplink-downlink special subframe configuration


type 6

Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN6.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
eNodeBs support different special subframe configurations (DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS
lengths).

Benefits
This feature allows operators to flexibly configure special subframe configurations according
to application scenarios, such as a different cell radius.

Description
eNodeBs support different special subframe configurations (DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS lengths)
specified in 3GPP TS 36.211.
Type 6: The length ratio of DwPTS to GP to UpPTS is 9:3:2 when eNodeBs adopt normal CP.
The length ratio of DwPTS to GP to UpPTS is 9:1:2 when eNodeBs adopt extended CP.
Table 3-9 and Table 3-10 special subframe configuration type 6.

Table 3-9 Special subframe configuration type 6 (normal CP)


Special Subframe Normal CP
Configuration
DwPTS GP UpPTS
6 19760Ts 6576Ts 4384Ts

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Table 3-10 Special subframe configuration type 6 (extended CP)


Special Subframe Extended CP
Configuration
DwPTS GP UpPTS
6 23040Ts 2560Ts 5120Ts

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The RRU3702, RRU3232, and RRU3233 do not support this feature.
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.

3.3.1.5 TDLOFD-00102605 uplink-downlink special subframe configuration


type 9

Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN7.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
The eNodeB supports special subframe configuration 9.

Benefits
More special subframe configurations are available.

Description
In compliance with 3GPP Release 11, eNodeBs additionally support special subframe
configuration 9 when the normal cyclic prefix (CP) is used. Table 3-11 lists the special
subframe configurations supported by eNodeBs.

Table 3-11 Special subframe configurations supported by eNodeBs


Special Normal CP Extended CP
Subframe
Configuration DwPTS GP UpPTS DwPTS GP UpPTS

0 3 10 1 3 8 1
1 9 4 8 3

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

2 10 3 9 2
3 11 2 10 1
4 12 1 3 7 2
5 3 9 2 8 2
6 9 3 9 1

7 10 2 5 5 2
8 11 1 – – –
9 6 6 2 – – –

Enhancement
None

Dependency
Special subframe configuration 9 requires UE support.

3.3.2 TDLOFD-001006 UL 64QAM


Availability
This feature is available as of LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
UL 64QAM enhances uplink modulation and allows UEs in excellent radio conditions to
transmit data to the eNodeB at high data rates.

Benefits
This feature increases cell throughput and improves user experience by providing high data
rates.

Description
UL 64QAM is a complement to Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) and 16QAM. UL
64QAM is intended to increase data rates for UEs in excellent radio conditions. If QPSK is
used, each symbol carries two information bits; if 16QAM is used, each symbol carries four
information bits. By contrast, if 64QAM is used, each symbol carries six information bits.
Therefore, 64QAM significantly improves system capacity in the uplink.
The eNodeB can select QAM modulation schemes of different orders based on radio
conditions. If a UE is located very close to the eNodeB or in excellent radio conditions, the
eNodeB can select 64QAM (the highest-order QAM modulation scheme) and allow uplink
transmission of large blocks to achieve high data rates.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This modulation scheme applies only to UEs in excellent channel conditions.
All category 5 or 8 UEs support UL 64QAM.
Category 6 or 7 UEs support UL 64 QAM only when the UEs support 3GPP release 12 and
report the supportOf64QAM-UL field.

3.3.3 TDLOFD-110227 Traffic Model Based Performance


Optimization
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.

Summary
This feature optimizes the enhanced proportional fair (EPF), a scheduling policy, for
non-GBR services considering factors such as the buffered data to be transmitted and the
transmission rates over the Uu interface.

Benefits
This feature increases the average perceivable data rates for non-GBR services in the uplink
and downlink during peak hours, improving user experience.

Description
This feature raises the scheduling priorities for "good users" who have small amounts of
buffered data to be transmitted and favorable channel conditions (high transmission rates over
the Uu interface). In heavy traffic scenarios (for example, when the RB usage is greater than
60%), the traditional PF scheduling algorithm may cause "bad users", who have large
amounts of buffered data to be transmitted and poor channel conditions, to occupy a large
number of scheduling opportunities. "Good users" who can be quickly scheduled must wait in
the queue for long periods and the average perceivable uplink and downlink data rates
decrease, reducing user experience. This feature raises the scheduling priorities for "good
users" and lowers the scheduling priorities for "bad users." Service performance for "good
users" is significantly improved at the little expense of insignificant performance degradation
for "bad users." The average perceivable uplink and downlink data rates in peak hours
increase and user experience is improved.
This feature is supported in cells with a bandwidth of at least 5 MHz.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 UE
None
 Transport network
None
 CN
None
 OSS
None
 Other features
None
 Other requirements
This feature is supported in cells with a bandwidth of at least 5 MHz.

3.3.4 TDLOFD-001015 Enhanced Scheduling


3.3.4.1 TDLOFD-00101501 CQI Adjustment

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
This feature enhances the conventional AMC scheme by introducing downlink CQI
adjustment. It provides additional performance gains.

Benefits
This feature brings the following benefits:
 Effectively compensates for inaccurate CQI measurement and makes the modulation and
coding scheme (MCS) selection more accurate by using a closed-loop mechanism.
 Improves system capacity by selecting an accurate MCS.
 Allows an adaptive CQI measurement in different scenarios and therefore improves
system capacity.

Description
Under the conventional AMC scheme, the eNodeB chooses an MCS for a UE based on the
reported CQI. As a result, the MCS will mainly change according to the reported CQI.
However, the UE measurement error and channel fading affects the accuracy of the reported

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

CQI to some extent. MCS selection based on an inaccurate CQI will cause a failure to reach
the block error rate (BLER) target in DL transmission. The conventional AMC scheme does
not have a closed-loop feedback mechanism to guarantee that the actual BLER reaches the
BLER target.
The CQI adjustment scheme introduces a closed-loop mechanism to compensate for CQI
measurement errors. When an eNodeB selects the MCS for DL transmission, in addition to
the CQI and transmit power, the eNodeB also considers the difference between the target
BLER and the actual BLER. Note that the actual BLER is calculated based on the closed-loop
ACK/NACK that the eNodeB received in DL transmission. In addition, the closed-loop
mechanism used in the CQI adjustment scheme allows the eNodeB to instruct a UE to change
the BLER target for CQI reporting, which can maximize system throughput.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

3.3.4.2 TDLOFD-00101502 Dynamic Scheduling

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
This feature achieves efficient resource utilization. The fairness between different UEs is also
considered in the function. The dynamic scheduling algorithm is mainly used for guaranteed
bit rate (GBR) and non-GBR services.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Achieves efficient resource utilization.
 Achieves an optimal tradeoff among throughput, fairness, and QoS.

Description
This feature achieves efficient resource utilization on a shared channel. In an LTE system, the
scheduler allocates resources to the UEs every 1 ms or every one TTI. The scheduling
algorithm must achieve a balanced tradeoff between priority differentiation among different
services and fairness among users.
The UL scheduler uses the token bucket algorithm to control GBR and non-GBR service rates.
The proportional fair (PF) algorithm is the basic strategy to ensure scheduling priorities
(based on the QCI) among different services. High priorities are assigned to IMS signaling
and GBR services. When the congestion indicator from the load control algorithm is received,
the scheduler may reduce the guaranteed data rate for GBR services. The scheduler may also
consider the input from UL ICIC to reduce interference. QCI is short for QoS class identifier.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

The DL scheduler uses an enhanced scheduling strategy. For GBR services, priorities are
calculated based on user channel quality and service packet delay. For non-GBR services, in
addition to user channel quality, the scheduled service throughput is also considered for
calculating the priority. The enhanced DL scheduler can guarantee an optimal tradeoff among
throughput, fairness, and QoS guarantee. Like the UL scheduler, the DL scheduler also
considers DL ICIC input to reduce inter-cell interference.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, when the Uu resources of a cell are congested, there is a possibility
that non-GBR services cannot be granted resources because non-GBR services have a lower
priority than GBR services. To address this issue, this feature allows a preset proportion of
resources to be reserved for non-GBR services, which ensures that there are always resources
for downlink non-GBR services.

Dependency
None

3.3.5 TDLOFD-081231 Optimized CFI-Calculation-based MCS


Index Selection
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.

Summary
This feature enables the eNodeB to use the adaptive CFI to select an accurate MCS index
based on the equivalence of spectral efficiency.

Benefits
This feature improves system throughput and increases the perceivable service rates for UEs
when the adaptive CFI is less than 3.

Description
The eNodeB uses the adaptive CFI to calculate the reported CQIs separately for common
subframes and special subframes. The calculation is based on the equivalence of spectral
efficiency.

Enhancement
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Dependency
None

3.3.6 TDLOFD-081233 Optimized Uplink Resource Allocation


Availability
This feature is
 applicable to Macro from LTE TDD eRAN8.1
 not applicable to Micro
 applicable to LampSite from LTE TDD eRAN8.1

Summary
The Optimized Uplink Resource Allocation feature incorporates the following functions:
 Scheduler-controlled power
 Optimization on false SR detection in DRX mode

Benefits
This feature helps to:
 Solve the problem that the PSD of data transmission from the UE declines due to the
limitation of the maximum transmit power of the UE, and improve user throughput.
 Prevent incorrect scheduling and incorrect adjustment due to false SR detection in DRX
mode, reduce the uplink and downlink BLER, improve user throughput, and reduce the
call drop rate.

Description
When the scheduler-controlled power function is enabled, the RBs allocated by the scheduler
outnumber the power-limited RBs and the PSD is lower than that in power control scenarios.
The scheduler maintains the PSD to a certain level to ensure that the user throughput does not
decrease.
The optimization on false SR detection in DRX mode function reduces the incorrect CQI and
SRS detection and incorrect scheduling when the eNodeB and UEs are in different DRX
states due to false SR detection.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 Other features
Optimization on false SR detection in DRX mode depends on the TDLBFD-002017
DRX feature.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

3.3.7 TDLOFD-070222 Scheduling Based on Max Bit Rate


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs and LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN7.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature enables eNodeBs to adjust scheduling weights based on aggregate maximum bit
rates (AMBRs) or maximum bit rates (MBRs) so that differentiated services can be provided
for subscribers.

Benefits
Operators can provide differentiated services for subscribers.

Description
For wireless broadband service packages, information about the AMBRs for non-GBR bearers
is stored in the policy and charging rules function (PCRF) or home subscriber server (HSS),
and information about the MBRs of GBR bearers is stored in the PCRF.
When a UE accesses the network, the PCRF or HSS notifies the eNodeB of the AMBR and
MBR configured for the UE. Then, the eNodeB adjusts uplink and downlink scheduling
weights for the UE based on the received AMBR and MBR information. This ensures that the
UEs configured with high AMBRs and MBRs are allocated high bandwidths.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

3.3.8 TDLOFD-001028 TCP Proxy Enhancer (TPE)


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Summary
A series of enhanced Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) functions adaptive to RAN link
characteristics are implemented in the eNodeB. This feature greatly improves the performance
of the TCP protocol (derived from the wired network) in the wireless network, therefore
enhancing user experience and system efficiency.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Mitigates the negative impact of some factors (such as RAN packet loss) on TCP data
transmission performance.
 Accelerates slow startup and fast retransmission of the server during data transmission.
 Greatly improves TCP transmission performance.

Description
The Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol is used worldwide. It
was initially developed for wired transmission and later used in wireless networks. However,
wireless networks exhibit some characteristics quite different from the wired network. To
mitigate this effect, a number of enhancements have been implemented in the eNodeB.
The TPE functionality, implemented in the eNodeB, improves data transmission performance
in the wireless network. The TPE processes the TCP/IP packets by adopting the following
TCP performance optimization technologies:
 ACK splitting
The congestion window is updated according to the number of received ACK messages
and is expanded by increasing the number of ACK messages. When slow startup occurs,
ACK splitting can quickly recover the congestion window. When the sender is in
congestion avoidance mode, ACK splitting can accelerate expansion of the congestion
window.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, this feature is enhanced by introducing the uplink ACK control
function to prevent bursts of ACKs.
In an LTE system, fluctuations over the air interface are inevitable. To ensure correct uplink
data transmission, HARQ or automatic repeat request (ARQ) is performed in the uplink to
ensure correct data transmission. According to 3GPP specifications for LTE, packets at the
Radio Link Control (RLC) layer must be transmitted in sequence. However, the HARQ/ARQ
transmission takes at least 8 ms, which may delay the in-sequence transmission of packets. If
the transmission is delayed, the packets to be transmitted are buffered, and then burst. For
downlink TCP services, ACK packets may also burst. As a result, downlink TCP services
burst as well, causing packet loss if the buffer of the transmission equipment is limited.
The ACK control function manages the uplink ACK traffic to prevent bursts of ACKs. If the
number of ACKs exceeds a threshold, the remaining ACKs are buffered for transmission in
the next transmission period. As a result, the ACK control function prevents bursts of
downlink data, reduces the packet loss rate, and increases average throughput.

Dependency
None

3.3.9 TDLOFD-001027 Active Queue Management (AQM)


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Summary
This feature provides an optimized buffer handling method to positively interact with the TCP
protocol and shorten the buffering delay.

Benefits
This feature decreases the delay of interactive services and improves user experience.

Description
In an interactive connection, the packet data to be transmitted is typically characterized by
large variations. To address this issue, the buffer is introduced. However, if the buffer is filled
or an overflow occurs, data packet loss will result.
Currently, TCP is the main transport layer protocol used on the Internet. Packet loss is
regarded as link congestion by TCP, and TCP will correspondingly reduce the data
transmission rate. The TCP protocol is also sensitive to round trip delay and will act
differently if just one packet is lost or if a burst of packets is lost. If a large number of packets
are discarded, it may take considerable time for the data rate to increase again, leading to low
radio link utilization and causing long delays for users.
In addition, if a user is performing concurrent services (such as FTP download and web
browsing), the file download as a dominant stream fills the buffers, leading to a long delay for
web browsing.
This feature can be disabled or enabled.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

3.3.10 TDLOFD-001029 Enhanced Admission Control


3.3.10.1 TDLOFD-00102901 Radio/transport Resource Pre-emption

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Summary
This feature enables service differentiation when the network is congested to provide better
services for high-priority users.

Benefits
This feature provides operators with a method to differentiate users according to priorities.
High-priority users can still obtain system resources in cases of resource limitation. In this
way, operators can provide better service to those high-priority users.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Description
Pre-emption is a function related to admission control and is the method for differentiating
services. It enables operators to provide different services by setting different priorities, which
affect the service setup success rate during the service setup procedure. If there are not enough
resources and a new service is not admitted to access the network, high-priority users have
more chances to access the network than low-priority users, and the resources of low-priority
users are pre-empted.
Priority information is obtained from the E-RAB-specific QoS parameters, including the
allocation/retention priority (ARP), in the ERAB SETUP REQUEST message. The eNodeB
assigns user priority based on ARP values. E-RAB is short for E-UTRAN radio access bearer.
Pre-emption is performed if service admission fails due to lack of resources, including S1
transmission resources and radio resources (for example, admission based on the QoS
satisfaction rate fails). The attributes of Pre-emption Capability and Pre-emption Vulnerability
indicate the capability of pre-empting resources of other services and vulnerability to
pre-emption by other services, respectively.
Pre-emption is not triggered for a signaling radio bearer (SRB) if resource allocation for SRB
fails. Emergency call (for example, E911) service has top priority, and therefore always has
pre-emption capability. In general, common services cannot pre-empt the resources for SRBs,
emergency calls, or IMS signaling.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, this feature allows resource pre-emption when the number of UEs that
have accessed cells reaches the maximum number of UEs supported by an eNodeB. With this
enhancement, high-priority services and services that must be guaranteed according to local
laws and regulations can pre-empt the resources of common services.
An eNodeB allows RRC connections to be established for all UEs that initially access the
network. During E-RAB setup, the eNodeB enables high-priority services and emergency
calls to pre-empt the resources of common services. The eNodeB selects high-priority
services and emergency calls based on ARP values, and selects common services, whose
resources are to be pre-empted, in the following sequence: non-GBR services on
unsynchronized UEs, non-GBR services on synchronized UEs, and low-priority GBR
services.

Dependency
This feature requires the core network to bring the ARP IE to eNodeB during E-RAB
assignment procedure so that the eNodeB can obtain service priorities with those E-RAB
parameters.

3.3.11 TDLOFD-001054 Flexible User Steering


3.3.11.1 TDLOFD-00105401 Camp & Handover Based on SPID

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN3.0.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Summary
This feature is used in the scenarios under which the operator wants to control the mobility of
an UE to make it camp on, redirect or handover to a suitable cell. The priorities for the cell
selection is predefined and configured to eNodeB through SPID (Subscriber Profile ID for
RAT/Frequency Priority).

Benefits
Operators can make its subscribers to camp in, redirect or handover to a suitable RAT (a cell
of LTE/UMTS/GSM) or frequency (a cell of LTE) based on the service characteristics. For
example, for a data centric subscriber, a LTE cell will be the more suitable selection than an
UMTS cell or a GSM cell; for a voice centric subscriber, a GSM cell or an UMTS cell will be
the more suitable selection than a LTE cell; UEs can return to their home public land mobile
networks (HPLMNs) when they move to the boundaries between roaming areas and
non-roaming areas. This way, operators can customize different camping policies for UEs.

Description
The SPID is an index referring to user information (for example, mobility profile and service
usage profile). The information is UE specific and applies to all its Radio Bearers.
This index is mapped by the eNodeB to locally defined configuration in order to apply
specific RRM strategies (for example, to define RRC_IDLE mode priorities and control
Inter-RAT/inter frequency redirection/ handover in RRC_CONNECTED mode).
In RRC_IDLE mode, UE can camp in a cell with its suitable RAT or frequency.
In RRC_CONNECTED mode, when load balance or overload control triggers an
inter-frequency or Inter-RAT handover or redirection, eNodeB will choose a suitable target
from the cells according to the priorities indexed by its SPID. In addition, when UE finish its
service, eNodeB can release it into a suitable cell according to its SPID priority. For UE
without SPID, when overload happens, the UE could also be redirect to a suitable cell
according to common priority and overload information.
This way, operator can configure and push subscribers into the suitable cell according its
subscription. For example: a dongle user usually stays in a LTE high frequency band for a
high service rate; a VoIP user is prior to stay in a LTE low frequency band to guarantee the
continuous coverage; UEs with a specific SPID can return to their HPLMNs from another
operator's network by using the PS handover, circuit switched fallback (CSFB), or single
radio voice call continuity (SRVCC) procedure.

Enhancement
 LTE TDD eRAN8.1
The "enhanced policy of SPID-specific handover back to the HPLMN" is introduced,
which enables UEs with a specific SPID to return to their HPLMNs by using the PS
handover, CSFB, or SRVCC procedure when they move to the boundaries between
roaming areas and non-roaming areas.
The "enhanced policy of SPID-specific handover back to the HPLMN" is controlled by
the SPID-based Select PLMN Algo Switch parameter.
− When this parameter is set to ON(On), the enhanced policy is enabled. After the
MME sends the SPID of a UE to the eNodeB:
If all neighboring cells on a specific frequency are not allowed to serve as candidate
cells for handovers during roaming, the eNodeB checks whether the PLMN of these

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

neighboring cells is on the HPLMN list corresponding to the UE's SPID (the list is
configured by the SpidHPlmnList MO). If it is, the eNodeB sends measurement
information about that frequency to the UE. If it is not, the eNodeB does not send
measurement information about that frequency to the UE.
If a neighboring cell on a specific frequency is allowed to serve as a candidate cell
for handovers during roaming, the eNodeB sends measurement information about
that frequency to the UE, regardless of whether the PLMN of the neighboring cell is
on the HPLMN list corresponding to the UE's SPID.
− When this parameter is set to OFF(Off), the enhanced policy is disabled.

Dependency
 CN
It depends on SAE to support the SPID configuration.
 Other features
The SPID-specific load-based handover policy in this feature requires TDLOFD-001032
Intra-LTE Load Balancing or TDLOFD-001044 Inter-RAT Load Sharing to UTRAN or
TDLOFD-001045 Inter-RAT Load Sharing to GERAN.
The SPID-specific handover back to the HPLMN policies in this feature require
TDLBFD-00201802 Coverage Based Inter-frequency or TDLOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT
Mobility between E-UTRAN and UTRAN.
 Others
GSM/UMTS network should support this functionality to avoid ping-pong handovers.

3.3.11.2 TDLOFD-00105402 WBB Subscriber Identification and Specified


QoS Guarantee

Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.

Summary
During network planning, operators specify SPIDs to be used by WBB UEs, and configure
the SPIDs on the home subscriber server (HSS), mobility management entity (MME), and
eNodeB for UE identification. When uplink and downlink bearers are set up for a WBB UE,
the MME includes the UE's SPID in the S1AP_INITIAL_CONTEXT_SETUP_REQ message
sent to the eNodeB. The eNodeB derives the SPID from the message. If the derived SPID is
the same as a WBB-service-specific SPID configured on the eNodeB, the eNodeB identifies
the WBB UE.
When WBB UEs access a network, the eNodeB provides flexible differentiated services,
including scheduling, discontinuous reception (DRX), and handover processing, to ensure
user experience of WBB and mobile broadband (MBB) services.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
 Using idle LTE air interface resources in low-PRB-usage areas, such as suburbans or
rural areas, operators develop WBB services, which improves the LTE spectral efficiency,
increases profits, and helps operators to preempt the broadband markett.
 The WBB solution includes the following functions: scheduling priorities for WBB UEs,
SPID-specific DRX policy, SPID-specific intra- and inter-frequency handover processing,
and WBB and MBB UE transfer for mobility load balancing (MLB). These features
enable operators to provide differentiated services to ensure WBB service development
and mobile broadband (MBB) user experience.

Description
With this feature, eNodeBs identify WBB UEs based on the SPIDs, and provide flexible
differentiated services for WBB UEs, including the following policies:
 WBB UE scheduling priority: To ensure differentiated service provision for WBB and
MBB UEs, the scheduling priority of WBB UEs must be adjusted to ensure that the
service experience of MBB UEs is preferentially guaranteed. The following formula
applies to the adjustment of the scheduling priority for non-GBR services for the WBB
UEs:
WBB_Priority = MBB_Priority x CoeffWBB
In this formula:
WBB_Priority indicates the WBB UE scheduling priority.
MBB_Priority indicates the MBB UE scheduling priority.
CoeffWBB indicates the WBB UE scheduling priority weight coefficient, which is used
for adjusting the scheduling weight of WBB UEs to MBB UEs.
 SPID-specific DRX policy: In most cases, WBB UEs have fixed locations and connect to
an external power supply, not sensitive to power consumption. Therefore, discontinuous
reception (DRX) can be disabled to optimize the WBB UE scheduling delay and service
experience.
 SPID-specific intra- and inter-frequency handover processing: In most cases, WBB UEs
have fixed locations and operators expect no WBB UE mobility. Therefore, intra- and
inter-frequency handover threshold offset factors are used for WBB UEs to suppress
their handovers. In this way, WBB service stability can be improved.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires the following features:
 TDLOFD-001054 Flexible User Steering: WBB UEs are identified based on the SPID,
and therefore the WBB subscriber identification and specified QoS guarantee feature
requires the flexible user steering feature.
 TDLOFD-001015 Enhanced Scheduling: QoS parameters related to the WBB UE
scheduling priority involve scheduling modules, and therefore the WBB subscriber
identification and specified QoS guarantee feature requires the enhanced scheduling
feature.
This feature is not compatible with TDLOFD-001133 Multi Operators SPID Policy.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

3.3.12 TDLOFD-001059 UL Pre-allocation Based on SPID


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN3.0.

Summary
Operators can configure a suitable SPID on the core network for each UE. When a UE
accesses the network, its SPID is transmitted to the eNodeB. Based on the SPID, the eNodeB
enables or disables the UL pre-allocation for the UE.

Benefits
Operators can assign different UL pre-allocation capabilities for different UEs. UL
pre-allocation is used for light-loaded cells to decrease the latency for a certain UE.

Description
The SPID is an index of user information (such as the mobility profile and service usage
profile). The information is UE-specific and applies to all its radio bearers.
The eNodeB maps this index to locally defined configuration to apply specific RRM policies.
The UL pre-allocation functionality allocates PUSCH RBs to a UE in a light-loaded cell even
if the sending buffer of the UE is empty. This feature allows the UE to quickly obtain the
transmission chance and accelerates the ACK of a DL RRC signaling message.
UL pre-allocation decreases UE transmission delay but increases UE power consumption.
Operators can modify related parameters to achieve an optimal tradeoff between transmission
delay and power consumption.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The SAE must support the SPID configuration.

3.3.13 TDLOFD-001109 DL Non-GBR Packet Bundling


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
This feature introduces delay control and bundles downlink packets before transmission.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

 Reduces PDCCH overhead and increases PDCCH capacity.


 Meets the delay requirements of best effort (BE) services and increases the eNodeB
throughput when both GBR and non-GBR services are in use.

Description
This feature primarily introduces delay control for BE services.
When the network load is light and resources for control and traffic channels are sufficient,
the eNodeB does not perform delay-based downlink packet bundling. If the packet delay
increases with the network load, the eNodeB bundles downlink packets to reduce PDCCH
overhead to improve BE service quality. The eNodeB also increases throughput when users
are performing both GBR and non-GBR services.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

3.4 Smart Phone Optimization


3.4.1 TDLOFD-001105 Dynamic DRX
3.4.1.1 TDLOFD-00110501 Dynamic DRX

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
Many smartphone applications use a few small packets or heartbeat packets. These
applications require the network to frequently reestablish radio resource control (RRC)
connections, causing signaling storms and ever-increasing UE power consumption. Dynamic
DRX enables smartphones to reduce their consumption of UL resources and energy when
using a few small packets or heartbeat packets.

Benefits
This feature reduces the following:
 Amount of signaling generated when UEs frequently switch between the
RRC_CONNECTED and RRC_IDLE modes.
This helps prevent signaling storms.
 Consumption of PUCCH and SRS resources.
 UE power consumption.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Description
Rich LTE applications increase smartphone service traffic, power consumption, and signaling
resource consumption, which imposes new requirements on UE power saving techniques.
 Many smartphone applications use a few small packets or heartbeat packets. After these
service sessions end, smartphones enter the RRC_IDLE mode to save battery power.
 However, for most services, smartphones remain online by periodically sending
heartbeat packets to the corresponding application servers. These heartbeats and other
instant service messages require networks to frequently reestablish connections and
therefore consume a large amount of signaling resources.
 When these services are used, networks can increase the time the smartphones remain in
RRC_CONNECTED mode. However, the smartphones consume more power.
Against this backdrop, Huawei introduces dynamic DRX to reduce smartphone consumption
of signaling resources and power. Dynamic DRX provides the following functions:
 Keeps smartphones in RRC_CONNECTED mode to reduce signaling.
 Enables smartphones to quickly enter the UL out-of-synchronization state to reduce
PUCCH resource consumption.
 Configures DRX parameters for the UL out-of-synchronization state with a longer DRX
cycle to reduce UE power consumption.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires TDLBFD-002017 DRX.

3.4.1.2 TDLOFD-00110502 High-Mobility-Triggered Idle Mode

Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN6.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
Moving UEs frequently perform handovers if they continue to process services. If the
signaling increase due to frequent UE handovers is greater than the signaling reduction gained
by UEs staying in the always-online state, this feature enables UEs to enter the idle mode to
prevent signaling bursts.

Benefits
This feature reduces the number of handovers and minimizes the impact of handover
signaling on network stability.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Description
This feature provides the following functions:
 Checks whether always-online UEs are in the high-mobility state.
 Supports feature performance monitoring.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires TDLOFD-001105 Dynamic DRX.

3.4.2 TDLOFD-080202 Intelligent Access Class Control


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.0.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.0.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.0.

Summary
This feature performs access class (AC) control when a large number of users access the
network simultaneously, such as in New Year party, concert, or gathering. AC control is
performed based on the cell congestion state to ensure smooth access of UEs and prevent a
sharp increase in signaling load.
This feature may affect user experience in network access. Therefore, it is recommended that
this feature be enabled only when a large number of users access the network simultaneously.

Benefits
This feature controls user access to prevent a sharp increase in signaling load. In addition, this
feature relieves cell congestion and improves the experience of users who have accessed the
network.

Description
As defined in 3GPP specifications, an eNodeB can send AC control parameters in system
information block type 2 (SIB2) to UEs in a cell. Based on these parameters, the UEs
determine whether they can access the cell. eNodeBs support AC control since eRAN2.1.
SIB2 can contain AC control parameters for multiple access types. The access types include
mobile-originated (MO) signaling, MO data, emergency call, multimedia telephony voice,
multimedia telephony video, and CSFB.
 For emergency calls, a parameter is used to specify whether to enable access barring.
 For other services, multiple parameters are used to specify the access probability factor,
access barring duration, and access barring indicators for UEs of ACs 11 to 15.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Intelligent AC control is introduced in eRAN8.0. With this feature, the eNodeB can determine
whether to start AC control based on the cell congestion state. After AC control is started, the
eNodeB dynamically adjusts AC control parameters until cell congestion is relieved.
Currently, only intelligent AC control for MO signaling and MO data is supported.

Enhancement
In eRAN11.1, the access probability factor adjustment step is configurable.

Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 UE
UEs must support the AC control mechanism defined in 3GPP Release 8.
 Transport network
None
 Core network
None
 OSS
None
 Other features
This feature requires TDLBFD-002009 Broadcast of system information.
 Others
None

3.5 Inter-RAT Mobility Solution


3.5.1 TDLOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN
and UTRAN
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
This feature implements inter-RAT cell selection and reselection between the E-UTRAN and
UTRAN and allows UEs to be handed over to a UTRAN cell due to limited cell coverage. If
the PS handover is not supported by the current network, the PS redirection between the
E-UTRAN and UTRAN is performed for inter-RAT mobility. Moreover, the blind handover is
performed if inter-RAT measurements may be omitted (to save time and resources) or are
unavailable.
PS handovers based on the uplink power are supported. When UE QoS cannot be met in the
uplink, the eNodeB can trigger an inter-RAT handover to a UTRAN cell to guarantee QoS.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Enables seamless co-existence between E-UTRAN and UTRAN.
 Guarantees a smooth evolution from the legacy wireless system to the LTE system.
 Provides supplementary coverage for the E-UTRAN using the legacy wireless systems to
prevent service drops and provide seamless coverage during initial LTE network
deployment.
 Improves network performance and user experience.

Description
A handover between the E-UTRAN and UTRAN is performed when a UE moves to an area
that is covered by the UTRAN but not covered by the E-UTRAN during initial LTE network
deployment.
In Huawei LTE TDD eRAN1.0, handovers are performed based on coverage by evaluating the
DL reference signals, including the RSRP and reference signal received quality (RSRQ) of the
E-UTRAN, and the received signal code power (RSCP) or Ec/N0 of the UTRAN.
When a UE moves beyond E-UTRAN coverage, the eNodeB determines whether to hand it
over from the E-UTRAN to the UTRAN according to its measurement report. After receiving
the handover command from the source eNodeB, the UE is handed over to the target UTRAN
cell.
The inter-RAT measurement of the target cell is gap-assisted for the UE with only one RF
receiver. In the serving cell, the inter-RAT measurement is triggered by an event A2 that
indicates the DL reference signal quality of the E-UTRAN is worse than the absolute
threshold. It is stopped by an event A1 that indicates the DL reference signal quality of the
E-UTRAN is better than the absolute threshold.
The inter-RAT handover is triggered by an event B1 that indicates the common pilot channel
(CPICH) quality, RSCP, and/or Ec/N0 of the UTRAN cells is better than the absolute
threshold. After receiving the UE measurement report, the eNodeB determines whether to
perform a handover to the UTRAN.
In LTE TDD eRAN2.0:
 If inter-RAT measurements may be omitted (to save time and resources) or are
unavailable, the eNodeB performs a blind handover to implement an inter-RAT handover
from the E-UTRAN to the UTRAN.
For example, if an E-UTRAN cell is co-sited with a UTRAN cell and covers the same
area, operators can configure the UTRAN cell as the target cell of the blind handovers
from the E-UTRAN cell. When handover trigger conditions (such as load or service
requirements) are met, the eNodeB can hand over the UE by performing a blind
handover to the target cell without inter-RAT measurement. Compared with a PS
handover, a blind handover consumes less time.
 If the legacy UTRAN network or UEs cannot support PS handovers, the eNodeB
performs a PS redirection to implement an inter-RAT handover between the UTRAN and
E-UTRAN. There is no update requirement for legacy UTRAN and UEs to support PS
redirection.
During a PS redirection, the carrier frequency information about the target system is
contained in the RRCConnectionRelease message, which is the same as the RRC
connection release procedure. After the source LTE system releases the RRC connection

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

of a UE, cell reselection to the target system is performed based on the carrier frequency
information received during the connection release and the reestablishment of a
connection to the target system. In summary, a PS-redirection-based handover procedure
consists of connection release, frequency reselection, and connection reestablishment.
Note that the preceding description applies to UEs in active mode.
When a UE is in idle mode, cell selection and reselection are used to search for a new serving
cell when the UE is initially powered on. The UE selects an inter-RAT cell based on priority
settings. The UE continually performs this procedure when it moves.
Cell selection and reselection to an inter-RAT system are usually performed in the following
scenarios:
 E-UTRAN to UTRAN cell reselection: The UE has initially camped on an E-UTRAN
cell. When the UE moves beyond E-UTRAN coverage, the UE must reselect a UTRAN
cell if available.
 UTRAN to E-UTRAN cell reselection: The UE has initially camped on a UTRAN cell.
When the UE enters an E-UTRAN cell and the E-UTRAN is configured with a higher
priority, the UE reselects the E-UTRAN cell. The priority information is broadcast in cell
system information.
When camping on a cell, the UE regularly searches for a better cell according to the cell
reselection criteria. If a better cell is detected, that cell is selected.
In general, the LTE system is limited in the uplink transmit power. QoS can sometimes be
guaranteed in the downlink, but not in the uplink even if the UE has transmitted data using
full power. To guarantee QoS in this scenario, Huawei eNodeBs support
uplink-transmission-power-based inter-RAT handover to the UTRAN.
When detecting that UE QoS cannot be guaranteed, the eNodeB sends a measurement control
message to the UE. When the UE reports B1 event to the eNodeB, the eNodeB determines
whether to perform a handover to the UTRAN.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, the following functions are enhanced:
 Connect frequency priority parameter for blind redirections
The target frequency for blind redirection to the UTRAN can be selected based on
frequency priorities to simplify the neighbor relationship at the initial stage of LTE
deployment.
After a UE accesses a cell, the UE reports two A2 events based on the signal quality of
neighboring cells:
− One event is used to trigger an inter-frequency handover measurement.
− The other event is used to trigger a blind redirection.
If event A2 for blind redirection is reported, the signal quality in the serving cell is
inadequate for UE services. During initial LTE network deployment, the neighbor
relationship is not configured for the eNodeB. Therefore, the eNodeB performs only
blind redirection for the UE.
 Differentiating UTRAN and GERAN measurement priorities
In coverage-based handover scenarios, different threshold offset configurations for event
A2 measurements on the UTRAN and GERAN can differentiate the measurement
priorities of these two networks.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Dependency
UEs must support this feature.
The UMTS and the core network must support PS handovers from the E-UTRAN and the
UTRAN.

3.5.2 TDLOFD-001043 Service based Inter-RAT handover to


UTRAN
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
This feature allows eNodeBs to set up VoIP services in the UMTS system because the LTE
system supports only data services.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
Utilizes legacy network resources.
Improves LTE system capacity while guaranteeing QoS.
Decreases the service drop rate and the possibility of system overload.

Description
When a UE requests VoIP service setup, the eNodeB sends an inter-RAT measurement control
message instructing the UE to execute the measurement. When the UE reports event B1 to the
eNodeB, the eNodeB determines whether to set up the service in the UMTS according to the
RAB-QCI-based handover policies.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support both LTE TDD and UMTS.
This feature depends on the RAB QCI, which helps to determine whether to execute a
handover.
This feature requires TDLOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and
UTRAN.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

3.5.3 TDLOFD-001072 Distance based Inter-RAT handover to


UTRAN
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN3.0.

Summary
Huawei LTE eNodeBs support distance-based handovers from the E-UTRAN to the UTRAN.

Benefits
This feature improves user experience.

Description
When moving beyond the serving eNodeB's coverage area at frequency F1, the user may still
experience a relatively strong signal from F1. This prevents the A2 event from triggering an
inter-RAT handover to the UTRAN, even though the neighboring UTRAN signal is much
better than that from F1. To ensure the best user connection, a distance-based handover to the
UTRAN is employed.
When the distance-based handover algorithm is used, the eNodeB must continuously measure
the distance to each UE based on the TA measurement. When the distance exceeds the
distance threshold specified by the operator, the inter-RAT gap-assisted measurement of the
neighboring UTRAN cell is triggered to find an optimal handover candidate to improve user
performance.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
UEs must support inter-RAT gap-assisted measurements of UTRAN cells.
This feature requires TDLOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and
UTRAN.

3.5.4 TDLOFD-001078 E-UTRAN to UTRAN CS/PS Steering


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN3.0.

Summary
Huawei eNodeBs support the prioritized inter-RAT frequency selection based on the
provisioned CS and/or PS service-type priorities during handovers from the E-UTRAN to the
UTRAN.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

This feature applies to coverage-based and CS-fallback-triggered handovers from the


E-UTRAN to the UTRAN.

Benefits
This feature is an enhanced LTE mobility feature that provides a flexible prioritized frequency
selection method for handovers from the E-UTRAN to the UTRAN. UEs performing different
CS and/or PS services can be steered from E-UTRAN to the designated high-priority
frequencies of UTRAN according to the operator's network planning and load-balancing
preferences.

Description
During a coverage-based or CS-fallback-triggered handover from the E-UTRAN to the
UTRAN, the eNodeB initiates inter-RAT measurement for the UE that support inter-RAT
measurement or performs an inter-RAT blind handover for the UE that cannot perform an
inter-RAT measurement. Huawei eNodeB can prioritize UTRAN frequencies based on the
types of CS or PS services used by the UE and the CS or PS priority of each frequency, and
then send the UE the highest priority frequency for either a blind handover or a blind
redirection if the UE does not support inter-RAT handover.

Enhancement
This feature is enhanced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0 to differentiate UTRAN CS and PS frequency
priorities. This function enables users to configure CS and PS frequency priorities based on
operator requirements.
In LTE TDD eRAN3.0, two CS and PS frequency priorities are available: high and low. In
LTE TDD eRAN6.0, 17 frequency priorities (from 0 to 16) are available, which allow a UE to
be preferentially handed over or redirected to a specified UTRAN frequency.

Dependency
This feature requires either of the following features:
 TDLOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and UTRAN
 TDLOFD-001033 CS Fallback to UTRAN

3.5.5 TDLOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN


and GERAN
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
This feature implements inter-RAT cell selection and reselection between the E-UTRAN and
GERAN and allows UEs to be handed over to an inter-RAT GERAN cell due to limited cell
coverage. If the PS handover is not supported by the current network, the PS redirection
between the E-UTRAN and GERAN is performed for inter-RAT mobility. Moreover, the
blind handover is performed if inter-RAT measurements may be omitted (to save time and
resources) or are unavailable.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

PS handovers based on the uplink power are supported. When UE QoS cannot be met in the
uplink, the eNodeB can trigger an inter-RAT handover to a GERAN cell to guarantee QoS.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Enables seamless co-existence between E-UTRAN and GERAN.
 Guarantees a smooth evolution from the legacy wireless system to the LTE system.
 Provides supplementary coverage for the E-UTRAN using the legacy wireless systems to
prevent service drops and provide seamless coverage during initial LTE network
deployment.
 Improves network performance and user experience.

Description
A handover between the E-UTRAN and GERAN is performed when a UE moves to an area
that is covered by the GERAN but not covered by the E-UTRAN during initial LTE network
deployment.
In Huawei LTE TDD eRAN1.0, handovers are performed based on coverage by evaluating the
DL reference signals, including the RSRP and RSRQ of the E-UTRAN, and carrier received
signal strength indicator (RSSI) of the GSM.
When a UE moves beyond E-UTRAN coverage, the eNodeB determines whether to hand it
over from the E-UTRAN to the GERAN according to its measurement report. After receiving
the handover command from the source eNodeB, the UE is handed over to the target GERAN
cell.
The inter-RAT measurement of the target cell is gap-assisted for the UE with only one RF
receiver. In the serving cell, the inter-RAT measurement is triggered by an event A2 that
indicates the DL reference signal quality of the E-UTRAN is worse than the absolute
threshold. It is stopped by an event A1 that indicates the DL reference signal quality of the
E-UTRAN is better than the absolute threshold.
The inter-RAT handover is triggered by an event B1 that indicates the carrier RSSI of the
GSM is better than the absolute threshold. After receiving the UE measurement report, the
eNodeB performs a handover to the GERAN.
Huawei eNodeBs also support PS handover between GERAN and E-UTRAN. In addition to
PS handovers, Huawei eNodeBs support cell change order (CCO) with or without network
assisted cell change (NACC) in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.
In LTE TDD eRAN2.0:
 If inter-RAT measurements may be omitted (to save time and resources) or are
unavailable, the eNodeB performs a blind handover to implement an inter-RAT handover
from the E-UTRAN to the GERAN.
For example, if an E-UTRAN cell is co-sited with a GERAN cell and covers the same
area, operators can configure the GERAN cell as the target cell of the blind handovers
from the E-UTRAN cell. When handover trigger conditions (such as load or service
requirements) are met, the eNodeB can hand over the UE by performing a blind
handover to the target cell without inter-RAT measurement. Compared with a PS
handover, a blind handover consumes less time.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

 If the legacy GERAN network or UEs cannot support PS handovers, the eNodeB
performs a PS redirection to implement an inter-RAT handover between the GERAN and
E-UTRAN.
During a PS redirection, the carrier frequency information about the target system is
contained in the RRCConnectionRelease message, which is the same as the RRC
connection release procedure. After the source system releases the RRC connection of a
UE, cell reselection to the target system is performed based on carrier frequency
information received during the connection release and the reestablishment of a
connection to the target system. In summary, a PS-redirection-based handover procedure
consists of connection release, frequency reselection, and connection reestablishment.
Note that the preceding description applies to UEs in active mode. In idle mode, cell selection
and reselection are used to search for a new serving cell when the UE is initially powered on.
The UE selects an inter-RAT cell based on priority settings. The UE continually performs this
procedure when it moves. Cell selection and reselection to an inter-RAT system are usually
performed in the following scenarios:
 E-UTRAN to GERAN cell reselection: The UE has initially camped on an E-UTRAN
cell. When the UE moves beyond E-UTRAN coverage, the UE must reselect a GERAN
cell if available.
 GERAN to E-UTRAN cell reselection: The UE has initially camped on a GERAN cell.
When the UE enters an E-UTRAN cell and the E-UTRAN is configured with a higher
priority, the UE reselects the E-UTRAN cell. The priority information is broadcast in cell
system information.
When camping on a cell, the UE regularly searches for a better cell according to the cell
reselection criteria. If a better cell is detected, that cell is selected.
In general, the LTE system is limited in the uplink. QoS can sometimes be guaranteed in the
downlink, but not in the uplink even if the UE has transmitted data using full power. To
guarantee QoS in this scenario, Huawei eNodeBs support uplink-transmission-power-based
inter-RAT handover to the GERAN.
When detecting that UE QoS cannot be guaranteed, the eNodeB sends a measurement control
message to the UE. When the UE reports B1 event to the eNodeB, the eNodeB determines
whether to perform a handover to the GERAN.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, the following functions are enhanced:
 Connect frequency priority parameter for blind redirections
The target frequency for blind redirection to the GERAN can be selected based on
frequency priorities to simplify the neighbor relationship during initial LTE network
deployment.
After a UE accesses a cell, the UE reports two A2 events based on the signal quality of
neighboring cells:
− One event is used to trigger an inter-frequency handover measurement.
− The other is used to trigger a blind redirection.
If event A2 for blind redirection is reported, the signal quality in the serving cell is
inadequate for UE services. During initial LTE network deployment, the neighbor
relationship is not configured for the eNodeB. Therefore, the eNodeB performs only
blind redirection for the UE.
 Differentiating UTRAN and GERAN measurement priorities

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

In coverage-based handover scenarios, different threshold offset configurations for event


A2 measurements on the UTRAN and GERAN can differentiate the measurement
priorities of these two networks.

Dependency
UEs must support this feature.
The GERAN and core network must support NACC and PS handovers between the GERAN
and E-UTRAN.

3.5.6 TDLOFD-001046 Service based Inter-RAT handover to


GERAN
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
This feature allows eNodeBs to set up VoIP services in the GSM system because the LTE
system supports only data services.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
Utilizes legacy network resources.
Improves LTE system capacity while guaranteeing QoS.
Decreases the service drop rate and the possibility of system overload.

Description
When a UE requests VoIP service setup, the eNodeB sends an inter-RAT measurement control
message instructing the UE to execute the measurement. When the UE reports event B1 to the
eNodeB, the eNodeB determines whether to set up the service in the GERAN according to the
RAB-QCI-based handover policies.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support LTE TDD and GSM.
This feature depends on the RAB QCI, which helps to determine whether to execute a
handover.
This feature requires TDLOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and
GERAN.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

3.5.7 TDLOFD-001073 Distance based Inter-RAT handover to


GERAN
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN3.0.

Summary
Huawei LTE eNodeBs support distance-based handovers from the E-UTRAN to the GERAN.

Benefits
This feature improves user experience.

Description
When moving beyond the serving eNodeB's coverage area at frequency F1, the user may still
experience a relatively strong signal from F1. This prevents the A2 event from triggering an
inter-RAT handover to the GERAN, even though the neighboring GERAN signal is much
better than that from F1. To ensure the best user connection, a distance-based handover to the
GERAN is employed.
When the distance-based handover algorithm is used, the eNodeB must continuously measure
the distance to each UE based on the TA measurement. When the distance exceeds the
distance threshold specified by the operator, the inter-RAT gap-assisted measurement of the
neighboring GERAN cell is triggered to find an optimal handover candidate to improve user
performance.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
UEs must support inter-RAT gap-assisted measurements of GERAN cells.
This feature requires TDLOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and
GERAN.

3.5.8 TDLOFD-001021 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN


and CDMA2000
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Summary
When this feature is enabled, the eNodeB can perform inter-RAT cell selection and reselection
or handovers for high rate packet data (HRPD) users between the E-UTRAN and CDMA2000
network.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Enables co-existence of the E-UTRAN and CDMA2000 network.
 Supports a smooth evolution from the CDMA2000 network to the E-UTRAN.
 Provides supplementary coverage for the E-UTRAN during initial LTE network
deployment to prevent service drops and implement seamless coverage.
 Improves network performance and user experience.

Description
The PS handover between the E-UTRAN and CDMA2000 network (that is, the HRPD
network) is a type of inter-RAT handover. During initial LTE network deployment, this type
of handover is performed when a UE moves from an E-UTRAN coverage area to a
CDMA2000 coverage area.
For a handover from the E-UTRAN to HRPD network, Huawei eNodeB supports both
non-optimized and optimized handover mechanisms defined in 3GPP TS 23.402:
 During a non-optimized handover, a UE does not pre-register in the HRPD system.
When moving beyond the E-UTRAN coverage area, the UE determines whether to
perform a handover from the E-UTRAN to the HRPD network based on the
measurement results, and then initiates the handover to the target HRPD cell.
 During an optimized handover, a UE pre-registers in the HRPD system. When moving
beyond the E-UTRAN coverage area, the eNodeB determines whether to perform a
handover from the E-UTRAN to the HRPD network based on the UE measurement
report. Upon receiving the handover command sent by the eNodeB, the UE initiates a
handover to the target HRPD cell.
The UE uses an RF channel to perform the gap-assisted measurement of the target inter-RAT
cell. The measurement is triggered by event A2 and stopped by event A1.
 When the measurement is triggered, the quality of E-UTRAN downlink reference signals
is poorer than a specific absolute threshold.
 When the measurement is stopped, the quality of E-UTRAN downlink reference signals
is better than the absolute threshold.
The inter-RAT handover parameters can be configured for different services.
Huawei eNodeB also supports PS handovers from the CDMA2000 network to the E-UTRAN.
However, from an E2E solution point of view, this type of handover depends on the LTE
system capabilities and requires that the CDMA2000 system and core network support this
type of handover.

Enhancement
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Dependency
UEs must support this feature.
The CDMA2000 system and core network must support PS handovers from the CDMA2000
network to the E-UTRAN.

3.5.9 TDLOFD-001111 PS Mobility from E-UTRAN to CDMA2000


HRPD Based on Frequency-specific Factors
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
When an operator has multiple CDMA2000 High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) frequencies in
one or multiple band classes, this feature enables the eNodeB to hand over or redirect UEs
from the E-UTRAN to the CDMA2000 HRPD network based on the frequency-specific
factors.

Benefits
This feature balances the loads between CDMA2000 HRPD frequencies.

Description
An operator owning multiple CDMA2000 HRPD frequencies can specify a handover or
redirection factor for each CDMA2000 HRPD frequency. Based on these factors, the eNodeB
determines the target CDMA2000 HRPD band class for handover or redirection.
The operator can specify the factors for CDMA2000 HRPD frequencies, based on their
respective loads. For example, an operator has two CDMA2000 HRPD bands: 800 MHz and
2.1 GHz. Generally, frequencies on the 800 MHz band are more heavily loaded than those on
the 2.1 GHz band. To balance the loads between these two bands, the operator sets the factors
for frequencies on the 800 MHz band to smaller values than those for frequencies on the 2.1
GHz band.
The following figure illustrates another example. In this situation, CDMA2000 HRPD
frequencies 1, 2, and 3 are assigned factors 0.7, 1, and 1, respectively. Then the number of
UEs that fall back to frequencies 1, 2, and 3 will meet the following condition:
Number of UEs in frequency 1:Number of UEs in frequency 2:Number of UEs in frequency 3
= 0.7:1:1

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Figure 3-5 Redirection from the E-UTRAN to the CDMA2000 HRPD network based on
frequency-specific factors

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires TDLOFD-001021 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and
CDMA2000.

3.5.10 TDLOFD-001050 Mobility between LTE TDD and LTE


FDD
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
This feature implements cell selection and reselection between the TDD E-UTRAN and FDD
E-UTRAN and allows UEs to be handed over between TDD and FDD cells.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Enables seamless coverage between TDD and FDD E-UTRANs.
 Improves network performance and user experience.

Description
Handover functionality is important in cellular telecommunications networks. It is performed
to ensure no service interruption. In LTE systems, handovers decrease communication delay,
expand coverage, and enhance system performance. Handovers between TDD and FDD
E-UTRANs enable seamless coverage between these two networks and improve network
performance and user experience.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

The handover procedure can be divided into four phases: measurement triggering, handover
measurement, handover decision, and handover execution. Upon receiving a UE measurement
report, the eNodeB makes a handover decision. If the measurement meets the handover
criteria, the eNodeB performs the handover.
Cell selection and reselection allow UEs in idle mode to select or reselect a cell to camp on
and to receive the most appropriate service support upon session activation in the LTE system.
Cell selection and reselection provide supplementary coverage in LTE systems regardless of
whether the TDD E-UTRAN or FDD E-UTRAN is deployed.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, the urgent redirection function has been provided by this feature.
After a UE accesses a cell, the eNodeB delivers two sets of event A2 configurations: one is
used for triggering measurements and the other is used for triggering urgent redirection. If
urgent redirection is triggered by event A2, the signal quality in the serving cell is poor and
the serving cell cannot provide services for the UE. In this case, the eNodeB blindly redirects
the UE to a neighboring LTE FDD cell.

Dependency
UEs and the core network must support this feature.

3.6 High Speed Mobility


3.6.1 TDLOFD-001007 High Speed Mobility
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN1.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature allows eNodeBs to provide services for UEs moving at up to 208 km/h and 305
km/h with good performance. High-speed access is one of the key features in Huawei
SingleRAN LTE solutions to provide high-speed coverage.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Allows Huawei LTE systems to provide good coverage for UEs moving at up to 208
km/h and 350 km/h.
 Provides seamless coverage in a high-speed scenario.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Description
This feature enables Huawei LTE systems to operate and perform well in high-speed
scenarios.
When a UE moves at high speeds, the fast fading effect on the LTE system becomes severe. It
is more difficult to achieve the same performance at high-speeds as compared to normal
speeds.
Huawei LTE TDD eRAN1.0 supports UE velocity up to 208 km/h and 350 km/h, which
covers most mobility scenarios in urban areas. The eNodeB must measure the UE mobility
speed and refine the channel estimation scheme accordingly. In addition, the MIMO scheme
and resource allocation mechanism are adaptively adjusted by the radio resource management
(RRM) function to meet high-speed performance requirements. For example, frequency
diversity mode is more suitable than frequency-selective scheduling, as is transmit diversity
rather than spatial multiplexing for a UE at high speeds.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, eNodeBs can work in 4T4R mode.

Dependency
eNodeBs must work in 4T4R or 2T2R mode.
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
Table 3-12 lists the mutually exclusive features.

Table 3-12 Mutually exclusive features

Mutually Exclusive Feature Reason


 TDLOFD-001049 Single Streaming In high speed cells, the estimated
Beamforming beamforming (BF) weight cannot reflect
 TDLOFD-001061 Dual streaming current channel conditions due to quick
Beamforming changes. In this case, BF performance has
no gain, and therefore BF is not supported.
 TDLOFD-001077 MU-Beamforming
TDLAOFD-003002 Intra-eNodeB DL DL CoMP requires accuracy of BF weight
CoMP in Adaptive Mode estimation. In high speed cells, the BF
weight cannot reflect current channel
conditions due to frequent changes.
Therefore, DL CoMP is not supported.
TDLOFD-001066 Intra-eNodeB UL CoMP UL CoMP requires event A3-based
measurement reports. In high speed cells,
information in event A3-based measurement
reports is inaccurate and coordinating cells
cannot be updated in time. In this case, UL
CoMP has no gain. Therefore, UL CoMP is
not supported.
TDLOFD-080203 Coordinated Scheduling In high mobility scenarios, cell load changes
based Power Control so rapidly that the centralized controller
cannot respond promptly.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Mutually Exclusive Feature Reason


 TDLAOFD-080405 Out of Band Relay The RRN is stationary and therefore it is not
Introduction applicable to access to high-speed cells.
 TDLAOFD-00100183 Relay Node
Identification

3.6.2 TDLOFD-080205 Handover Enhancement at Speed Mobility


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
To ensure sufficient resources for high-speed UEs in high-speed mobility scenarios (such as
high-speed railways), this feature provides the following functions:
 eNodeBs hand over low-speed UEs out from high-speed cells.
 eNodeBs hand over high-speed UEs to high-speed cells, preventing them from being
handed over to normal cells.
 eNodeBs redirect dedicated network users who exit the dedicated network and initiate
services in the public network back to the dedicated network, preventing frequent
handovers and improving user experience.

Benefits
User experience improves in high-speed mobility scenarios.

Description
Generally, a dedicated network is deployed for high-speed mobility scenarios (such as
high-speed railways). To prevent low-speed UEs from occupying resources in this network,
the eNodeBs enabled with this feature hand over these UEs out of the dedicated network. In
addition, the eNodeBs hand over high-speed UEs to cells enabled with the high-speed
mobility feature in the dedicated network, preventing them from being handed over to public
network cells. This ensures that high-speed UEs can obtain sufficient resources in the
dedicated network. As a result, user experience is improved and the value of the dedicated
network is maximized.

Enhancement
eRAN8.1:
High-speed UE handover frequency-based redirection distinguishes between high-speed UEs
and low-speed UEs in the public network based on how often handovers are triggered. This
feature applies to scenarios in which high-speed railway dedicated network cells and public

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

network inter-frequency neighboring cells overlap. For high-speed UEs that exit the dedicated
network and connect to the neighboring normal cells, handovers are performed frequently in
the public network because the coverage range of the normal cells is small, for example, more
than three times within 30s. This feature enables the eNodeB to redirect these UEs back to the
dedicated network. UEs that are experiencing ping-pong handovers or performing voice
services are not redirected back to the dedicated network.

Dependency
 Prerequisite feature
TDLOFD-001007 High Speed Mobility
 Other features
Table 3-13 lists the mutually exclusive features.

Table 3-13 Mutually exclusive features

Mutually Exclusive Feature Reason


 TDLOFD-001049 Single Streaming In high-speed mobility scenarios, the
Beamforming estimated beamforming (BF) weight cannot
 TDLOFD-001061 Dual Streaming reflect current channel conditions due to
Beamforming quick channel changes. In this case, BF
performance has no gain, and therefore BF
 TDLOFD-001077 MU-Beamforming is not supported.
TDLAOFD-003002 Intra-eNodeB DL DL CoMP depends on accurate BF weight
CoMP in Adaptive Mode estimation. In high-speed mobility
scenarios, the BF weight cannot reflect
current channel conditions due to frequent
channel changes. Therefore, DL CoMP is
not supported.
TDLOFD-001066 Intra-eNodeB UL CoMP UL CoMP requires event A3-based
measurement reports. In high-speed
mobility scenarios, information in event
A3-based measurement reports is inaccurate
and coordinating cells cannot be updated in
time. In this case, UL CoMP has no gain.
Therefore, UL CoMP is not supported.
TDLOFD-080203 Coordinated Scheduling In high-speed mobility scenarios, cell load
based Power Control changes so rapidly that the centralized
controller cannot respond promptly.
 TDLAOFD-080405 Out of Band Relay The RRN is stationary and therefore it is not
Introduction applicable to network access from
 TDLAOFD-00100183 Relay Node high-speed cells.
Identification

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

3.7 Coverage Enhancement


3.7.1 TDLOFD-001009 Extended Cell Access Radius
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN6.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
To improve wireless network coverage, 3GPP TS36.211 has defined five types of preamble
formats (0 - 4) for frame structure type 2. For format 0 and format 4, it corresponds to small
cell access radius, for format 1, 2 and 3, they correspond to extended cell access radius.

Benefits
This feature is used in large cell scenario to extend the cell access radius.

Description
This feature provides operator with support of extended cell radius. According to the 3GPP
TS36.211, there are five types of preamble format (0-4) for PRACH are defined to support
different cell access radius, shown in Table 3-14.

Table 3-14 Preamble formats and cell access radius

Preamble format Cell Access Radius


0 About 15km
1 About 70km
2 About 30km
3 About 100km
4 About 1.4km

The extended cell radius consists of format 1, 2 and 3. For format 3, the supported cell access
radius is about 100 km, which is used in the large cell scenario to enhance the system
coverage.

Enhancement
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

Dependencies
The LBBPc cannot support Preamble format 1, 2 and 3.

3.7.2 TDLOFD-001031 Extended CP


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN3.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
The CP is the guard interval used in the OFDM to decrease the interference caused by the
multi-path delay. 3GPP TS36.211 defines two types of CP length: normal and extended.

Benefits
The normal CP and the extended CP are used in different cell scenarios:
 When the multi-path delay is short, normal CP can achieve better system performance.
 When the multi-path delay is long, extended CP can achieve better system performance.

Description
In both the downlink and uplink, the extended CP is calculated as follows:
Extended cyclic prefix: TCP = 512 x Ts
Where Ts = 1/(2048 x Df), Df = 15 kHz
For normal CP, there are seven symbols available in one slot. For extended CP, there are six
symbols available in one slot. The extended CP increases overhead in exchange for larger
multi-path capability.
The CP length is set in the network planning phase according to the system application
scenario.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support the same length of extended CP as the eNodeB.
This feature only applies to macro eNodeBs.
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
This feature is only supported by the following RF modules: RRU3232, RRU3235, and
RRU3252.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

This feature does not work when the eNodeB bandwidth is 5 MHz.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001075 SFN
 TDLOFD-002008 Adaptive SFN/SDMA
 TDLOFD-001098 Inter-BBP SFN
 TDLOFD-001080 Inter-BBU SFN
 TDLOFD-001081 Inter-BBP Adaptive SFN/SDMA
 TDLOFD-001082 Inter-BBU Adaptive SFN/SDMA
 TDLOFD-001049 Single Streaming Beamforming
 TDLOFD-001061 Dual Streaming Beamforming
 TDLOFD-001077 MU-Beamforming
 TDLAOFD-003001 DL CoMP Introduction Package

3.8 WBB
3.8.1 TDLOFD-110223 Specified Service Carrier
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.

Summary
With the increase of WBB UEs, the network load increases. To ensure the MBB and WBB
user experience, operators add specified service carriers that only WBB UEs can camp on to
increase network capacity.

Benefits
 Using idle LTE air interface resources in low-PRB-usage areas, such as suburbans or
rural areas, operators develop WBB services, which improves the LTE spectral efficiency,
increases profits, and helps operators to preempt the broadband market.
 Operators select specified service carriers that only WBB UEs can camp on for capacity
expansion, which reduces the network load and prevents network congestion due to the
increasing number of WBB UEs.

Description
The following operations are performed to achieve the specified service carrier function:
 Outgoing handover of MBB UEs that access specified service carriers: When a UE
accesses, is handed over to, or reestablishes a connection to a cell, the eNodeB checks
whether the serving carrier is a specified service carrier. If so, the eNodeB checks

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 3 Radio & Performance

whether the UE is an MBB UE. For an MBB UE, a carrier attribute-based


inter-frequency handover is triggered.
 Prohibiting handovers of non-emergency-call MBB UEs to specified-service cells:
− Filters out frequencies whose neighboring frequencies are all used for
specified-service cells, when the eNodeB is about to instruct an MBB UE to
perform measurements for an inter-frequency handover during a
non-emergency-call service.
− Filters out neighboring cells that are specified-service cells from the target cell list,
after the eNodeB receives an intra- or inter-frequency measurement report from an
MBB UE using a non-emergency-call service.
− Filters out specified-service cells from the candidate inter-frequency neighboring
cell list, when the eNodeB is selecting a target cell for blind handover of a
non-emergency-call MBB UE based on the blind handover priorities of neighboring
cells.
− Filters out frequencies whose neighboring frequencies are all used for
specified-service cells, when the eNodeB is selecting a target frequency for blind
redirection of a non-emergency-call MBB UE based on the frequency priorities.
The frequency priorities used as the selection basis can be those specified for
mobility management of RRC_CONNECTED UEs or the intra-RAT frequency
priorities specified for SPIDs. If no neighboring cell has been established on a
frequency to be filtered out, this frequency is retained for blind redirection.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

4 Networking & Transmission & Security

4.1 Transmission & Synchronization


4.1.1 TDLOFD-001076 CPRI Compression
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs and LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN6.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature reduces the common public radio interface (CPRI) bandwidth required by a cell.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Increases the number of RRUs that can be cascaded on a CPRI port.
 Decreases the number of optical fibers.
 Reduces eNodeB installation and reconstruction costs.

Description
This feature decreases CPRI bandwidth resources required by a cell. More RRUs can be
cascaded on a CPRI port without changing the CPRI line rate, cell bandwidth, or number of
antennas for the cell. This reduces eNodeB installation and reconstruction costs.
When this feature is enabled, the CPRI data on the LBBPd and LBBPc decreases to about
50% and 60% of the original CPRI data, respectively. The extent of reduction is determined
by the processing capabilities of the two boards.

Enhancement
eRAN7.0 supports CPRI compression when the eNodeB bandwidth is 10 MHz or 20 MHz.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

eRAN8.0 supports CPRI compression when the eNodeB bandwidth is 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or
20 MHz.

Dependency
This feature can work only when the eNodeB bandwidth is 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz.
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
This feature cannot be used with TDLOFD-001031 Extended CP.
RRU3251, RRU3252, RRU3253, RRU3256, RRU3257, RRU3210, RRU3152e, RRU3235,
RRU3259, RRU3221E, RRU3273, and RRU3279 support this feature.

4.1.2 TDLOFD-081214 Enhanced CPRI Compression


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
Compared with CPRI compression, this feature can further reduce the required cell
bandwidth.

Benefits
With this feature, more cells can be cascaded in a CPRI chain, thereby reducing capital
expenditure (CAPEX) spent on eNodeBs, optical fibers, and optical modules.

Description
This feature reduces the required cell bandwidth. With this feature, more cells can be
cascaded in a CPRI chain without changing the CPRI port line rate, the amount of frequency
bandwidth resources, or the number of antennas. In this way, fewer eNodeBs are required for
networking, thereby reducing optical fiber costs.
When this feature is enabled, the CPRI bandwidth in a cell with a bandwidth of 15 MHz or 20
MHz is reduced by about 33%.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires TDLOFD-001076 CPRI Compression.
When this feature is enabled, the eNodeB channel bandwidth must be 15 MHz or 20 MHz.
This feature does not work with TDLOFD-001031 Extended CP.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

This feature requires UBBPd or UBBPe.


Only RRU3252, RRU3259, and RRU3279 support this feature.

4.1.3 TDLOFD-003002 2G/3G and LTE Co-transmission


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
This feature allows LTE co-transmission with legacy networks such as GSM, UMTS, or
TD-SCDMA to improve resource utilization and decrease operating expense (OPEX).

Benefits
In co-site scenarios, this feature provides the following benefits:
 Improves transmission resource utilization.
 Decreases operating expense (OPEX), such as transmission resource rental fees.

Description
eNodeBs support co-transmission with GSM, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA base stations.
During site deployment, an eNodeB may share a site with a GSM, UMTS, or TD-SCDMA
base station. In this case, co-transmission facilitates better utilization of transmission
resources and reduces OPEX.
Figure 4-1 illustrates 2G/3G and LTE co-transmission.

Figure 4-1 2G/3G and LTE co-transmission

Co-transmission depends on four sub functions: multiple ports, IP route, DHCP relay, and
weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling. They are described as follows:
 Multiple ports: eNodeB supports several Ethernet interfaces.
 IP route: The data of cascaded base stations is transmitted to the IP network through IP
routes on the eNodeB. IP routes can be configured by operators.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

 DHCP relay: In general, a cascaded base station functions as the DHCP client and the
DHCP server must be located in the same broadcast domain. The base station obtains the
IP address with the DHCP function. In the co-transmission scenario, however, the
cascaded base station is not located in the same broadcast domain as the DHCP server.
DHCP relay provides a method to transfer DHCP messages between different broadcast
domains.
 WRR scheduling: Ensures fair data transmission between the cascaded base station and
eNodeB. Data are scheduled according to a weight, which is computed based on traffic
bandwidth. Each base station and eNodeB has a weight and then an opportunity to be
scheduled.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
GSM, UMTS, and TD-SCDMA base stations must support the IP protocol.

4.1.4 TDLOFD-003011 Enhanced Transmission QoS Management


4.1.4.1 TDLOFD-00301101 Transport Overbooking

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
This feature allows the admission of more users while guaranteeing QoS by using the
following mechanisms:
 Enhanced admission control mechanism: Transport Admission Control (TAC).
 QoS mechanisms: traffic shaping and congestion control.

Benefits
This feature increases the number of admitted users.

Description
The implementation of this feature requires the following mechanisms:
 TAC: Allows the bandwidth for user admission control to be larger than the bandwidth of
the physical port. By using this mechanism, operators can set the admission threshold to
allow the admission of more users.
 Traffic shaping: Guarantees that the total available traffic bandwidth is not larger than
the total configured bandwidth. The minimum transmission bandwidth of each resource
group supported by eNodeB is 64 kbit/s for dual rate and 32 kbit/s for single rate. The
bandwidth granularity is 1 kbit/s.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

 Congestion control: Detects congestion. If congestion is detected, a signal is sent to the


data source indicating congestion and then selected low-priority packets are discarded.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The core network must support this feature because SAE uses the TAC over the S1 interface.

4.1.4.2 TDLOFD-00301102 Transport Differentiated Flow Control

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
This feature enhances the following mechanisms:
 Admission control: TAC.
 Queue scheduling: priority queue (PQ) scheduling and WRR scheduling.
 Back-pressure flow control.

Benefits
This feature provides users with differentiated services while guaranteeing equitable
distribution of bandwidth.

Description
Transmission differentiated flow control provides users with differentiated services while
guaranteeing equitable distribution of bandwidth.
 Equitable distribution of bandwidth: Each admitted user can be allocated some
bandwidth.
 Differentiation: High-priority users take precedence over low-priority users.
The implementation of this feature requires the following mechanisms:
 TAC: In case of GBR services, the bandwidth allocated to services is computed based on
the GBR. Otherwise, it is computed based on the default reserved bandwidth (for
example, non-GBR services).
 Queue scheduling: Services enter PQ and WRR queues based on service priorities.
Services that enter the PQ queues have the highest scheduling priority, and services that
enter the WRR queues are scheduled according to the weight, which is computed based
on the service bandwidth. Each service has a weight and then an opportunity to be
scheduled.
 Back-pressure flow control: Detects congestion on the S1 interface. If congestion is
detected, a signal is sent to the data source indicating congestion and then selected
low-priority packets are discarded.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

4.1.4.3 TDLOFD-00301103 Transport Resource Overload Control

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
This feature rapidly enhances transmission stability when transmission resources are
unexpectedly overloaded.

Benefits
This feature provides protection for the system when transmission resources are unexpectedly
overloaded.

Description
There are two scenarios of unexpected overload:
 The transport bearer bandwidth (the bandwidth available in the system) is greatly
increased or decreased. For example, the transmission bandwidth decreases from 20
Mbit/s to 10 Mbit/s because of network failure.
 The traffic bandwidth (the bandwidth used in the system) is greatly increased or
decreased. For example, the traffic bandwidth rapidly increases from 5 Mb/s to 10 Mb/s.
In either of the preceding scenarios, actions such as releasing low-priority users must be taken
to guarantee QoS for high-priority users.
The actions to be taken depend on the ARP, which defines whether a user can be released
when transmission resources are overloaded.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

4.1.5 TDLOFD-003012 IP Performance Monitoring


4.1.5.1 TDLOFD-00301201 IP Performance Monitoring

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
This feature enhances performance management by providing an E2E network monitoring
mechanism and acquiring key performance indicators (KPIs) such as information about traffic
volume, packet loss rate, delay, and jitter.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Allows operators to monitor E2E network performance.
 Enhances system maintainability and testability.
 Improves system performance.

Description
This feature complies with a Huawei proprietary protocol.
An eNodeB periodically sends detecting packets to the peer device such as the S-GW, and the
peer device returns the response packets. The eNodeB acquires KPIs, such as traffic volume,
packet loss rate, delay, and jitter from these response packets. These KPIs allow operators to
learn about the network quality and provide a reference for taking actions, such as network
optimization and network expansion.
In addition, the IP PM feature helps operators to identify whether a fault occurred in
transmission network devices or LTE devices when LTE devices such as the eNodeB and
S-GW are enabled with IP PM. Furthermore, if all NEs are enabled with IP PM, the fault can
be quickly located.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The core network must support this feature.
This feature cannot be used with TDLOFD-001134 Virtual Routing & Forwarding.

4.1.5.2 TDLOFD-00301202 Transport Dynamic Flow Control

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Summary
According to the network quality detected by IP PM, the transmission dynamic flow control
feature can dynamically adjust flow control parameters.

Benefits
Flow control parameters are dynamically adjusted to adapt to network quality, which changes
dynamically.

Description
When network quality is unstable, it is recommended to dynamically adjust flow control
parameters, such as bandwidth. This feature provides a method to dynamically adjust QoS
parameters according to the network quality detected by IPPM. For example, when the
network quality is good, transmission dynamic flow control automatically increases the
bandwidth incrementally. Otherwise, it decreases the bandwidth.
IP PM provides an E2E network performance monitoring method to acquire information
about network quality, such as traffic volume, packet loss rate, delay, and jitter.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires TDLOFD-00301201 IP Performance Monitoring and
TDLOFD-00301102 Transport Differentiated Flow Control.
This feature cannot be used with TDLOFD-001134 Virtual Routing & Forwarding.

4.1.6 TDLOFD-003018 IP Active Performance Measurement


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.1.
Appliable to Micro from LTE TDD eRAN8.0

Summary
The IP active performance measurement feature complies with the IETF IP PM standards,
RFC2678, RFC2680, RFC2681, RFC3393, and the Two-Way Active Measurement Protocol
(TWAMP) in RFC5357.
IP transmission performance can be detected between an eNodeB and a device that complies
with RFC5357 (TWAMP), for example, between an eNodeB and a CN, between an eNodeB
and a transmission device (for example, a router), and between an eNodeB and a test device.
This feature implements the following functions:
 Network performance monitoring
When the transmission rate is unstable and the transmission bandwidth dynamically
changes, this function can detect the transport network's quality of service (QoS) so

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

operators can quickly locate network problems and take corrective measures, such as
capacity expansion and network optimization.
 Transmission fault diagnosis
− Quickly locates and isolates transmission faults, such as a high packet loss rate or a
long delay, using TWAMP.
− Troubleshoots a transport network on a per segment basis by measuring round-trip
network performance between an eNodeB and a transmission device (such as an
intermediate router that supports TWAMP), therefore facilitating network
maintainability and reducing maintenance costs.
TWAMP testing uses User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet injection, which
generates traffic on the transport network and therefore occupies some bandwidth.
For example, if 80-byte packets are continuously sent at a rate of 10 packets per
second in a test stream, the bandwidth consumption is 6.4 kbit/s.

Benefits
This feature offers the following benefits:
 Helps operators quickly locate and rectify faults on networks.
 Facilitates network maintainability and reduces maintenance costs.

Description
Based on the TWAMP protocol, this feature monitors the QoS of the transport network, such
as the packet loss rate, round-trip delay, and jitter.
The TWAMP architecture is composed of four logical parts: Session-Sender,
Session-Reflector, Control-Client, and Server.
TWAMP measurement includes testing and negotiation.
 Testing is conducted between the Session-Sender and Session-Reflector based on the
UDP protocol. The Session-Sender and Session-Reflector function as TWAMP test hosts
and exchange UDP packets for testing. The Session-Sender sends test packets to the
Session-Reflector and the Session-Reflector responds to the test packets.
 Negotiation is conducted between the Control-Client and Server using Transmission
Control Protocol (TCP) packets on port 862. The Control-Client and Server exchange
TCP packets to manage measurement tasks, for example, to initialize, start, and stop the
tasks.

The Session-Sender actively inserts test packets for the Session-Reflector's response. The
inserted test packets contain the same Session-Sender IP address, Session-Reflector IP address,
UDP port number, and Type-P, and are transmitted in a fixed stream. The Type-P descriptor
can be the protocol type, port number, packet length, or DSCP value.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

TWAMP actively inserts test packets on test links and calculates the packet loss rate, delay,
and delay variation, and round-trip delay based on fields contained in the test packets. The
Session-Sender and Session-Reflector exchange test packets as follows:
1. The Session-Sender includes sequence numbers and timestamp T1 in the test packets and
sends them to the Session-Reflector.
2. The Session-Reflector records timestamp T2 upon receiving the test packets from the
Session-Sender. The Session-Reflector copies the packet sequence numbers and
timestamp T1 extracted from the received packets into the corresponding reflected
packets, which are then sent to the Session-Sender. The corresponding reflected packets
also include the Session-Reflector's transmit sequence numbers and timestamp T3.
3. The Session-Sender records timestamp T4 upon receiving the response packets from the
Session-Reflector and then calculates the number of received packets
This feature supports unauthenticated mode.

This feature uses the following formulas to calculate the packet loss rate and the round-trip
delay:
 Packet loss rate in a measurement period = Number of lost packets/Number of
transmitted packets
The number of lost packets is calculated based on the numbers of packets transmitted
and received by the Session-Sender and those transmitted by the Session-Reflector.
 Round-trip delay = (T2 - T1) + (T4 - T3) = (T4 - T1) - (T3 - T2)
This feature calculates the packet delay variation based on the delays of two adjacent packets.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
The peer devices and CN must support the TWAMP protocol.

4.1.7 TDLOFD-003013 Enhanced Synchronization


4.1.7.1 TDLOFD-00301302 IEEE1588 V2 Clock Synchronization

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Summary
The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) in IEEE1588 defines precision to the microsecond and
applies to the standard Ethernet.
This feature implements precise synchronization of distributed and independent clocks in
measurement and control systems. LTE networks can achieve high-accuracy frequency
synchronization and time synchronization between clock servers and eNodeBs.
IEEE1588 V2 clock synchronization is an alternative clock solution for GPS clock
synchronization.

Benefits
Compared with the GPS clock solution, IEEE1588 V2 clock synchronization reduces the
network deployment cost for operators and offers easy management and maintenance.

Description
 Basic principles
Figure 4-2 illustrates the basic principles of IEEE 1588.

Figure 4-2 Basic principles of IEEE 1588

The NE with the master clock sends synchronization timing packets to the NE with the
slave clock. The intermediate switching device connects to the NE with the master clock
and functions as a slave clock to obtain the timing information on the transmission of the
master clock. Then, the intermediate switching device functions as a master clock and
connects to other devices functioning as slave clocks.
The Time Stamp Unit (TSU) implements precise time synchronization to reduce delay
and jitter caused by the intermediate switching device and sends accurate timing
information. Synchronization processing is shifted to the layer between the physical
layer and the MAC layer.
 Synchronization principles

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Figure 4-3 illustrates the synchronization principles of IEEE 1588.

Figure 4-3 Synchronization principles of IEEE 1588

The signaling process illustrated in Figure 4-3 is as follows:


a. The clock server (for example, IPCLK1000) periodically sends a Sync message to
the eNodeB.
The Sync message carries standard time information, such as year, month, date,
hour, minute, second, and nanosecond. The eNodeB records T2, which indicates the
Sync message arrival time at the eNodeB. The time for sending or receiving the
message must be measured and recorded at the underlying physical layer or close to
the physical layer to improve clock accuracy.
In the IEEE1588 standard, the optional hardware assist techniques are designed to
improve clock accuracy. If the Sync message is generated by using hardware assist
techniques, the message can also carry the timestamp T1, indicating when the
message is sent. If the Sync message delay from the clock server is uncertain, the
clock server generates a Follow_UP message, which carries the timestamp T1. The
Follow_UP message is optional.
b. The eNodeB responds with a Delay_req message at T3.
The eNodeB records T3. The clock server receives the Delay_req message at T4
and then generates a Delay_resp message that carries the timestamp T4 to the
eNodeB. The delay sending the Delay_resp message does not affect T4. Therefore,
the Delay_resp message does not require real-time processing.
c. The eNodeB stores the complete information about T1, T2, T3, and T4.
Then, the delay of message exchange between the clock server and the eNodeB is
calculated as follows:
Delay = [(T4 – T1) – (T3 – T2)]/2

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

In principle, the absolute time of the eNodeB is equal to the standard time plus the
delay carried in the Sync message.

Enhancement
 LTE TDD eRAN2.2
IEEE1588 V2 security in frequency synchronization mode is enhanced by transmitting
IEEE1588 V2–related messages on Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) tunnels.
 LTE TDD eRAN8.1
Supports the ITU-T G.8275.1 time synchronization protocol, which applies to the
interconnection between the eNodeB and the third-party network transmission devices
that comply with this protocol in IEEE1588 V2 layer 2 multicast networking mode.

Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 UE
None
 Transport Network
For time synchronization, all devices on the clock relay path must support the
IEEE1588V2 standard. For frequency synchronization, there is no requirement for
devices on the clock replay path.
 CN
None
 OSS
None
 Other Features
This feature cannot coexist with the feature TDLOFD-001134 Virtual Routing &
Forwarding.
 Others
None

4.1.8 TDLOFD-081213 Inter-BBU Clock Sharing


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro and LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Unavailable in micro eNodeBs.
 Applicable only to centralized Cloud BB networking.

Summary
This feature enables a reference clock (including GPS/RGPS and 1588v2) to be shared among
BBUs. In some scenarios where the GPS reference clock cannot be deployed on BBUs in a
cloud, this feature enables the USU to deliver a reference clock to these BBUs, which

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

improves BBU clock reliability. The GPS reference clock mentioned in this section includes
RGPS.

Benefits
This feature resolves the issue that the GPS reference clock cannot be deployed on BBUs in
some scenarios, which improves BBU clock reliability.

Description
With this feature, the USU delivers the clock of the BBU that has locked the GPS reference
clock to other BBUs, including LampSite BBUs. The clock working mode of these BBUs can
be set to manual so that these BBUs can synchronize their clock with the GPS reference clock
delivered by the USU. Alternatively, the clock working mode can be set to automatic. In this
way, the BBUs select a reference clock based on the priorities and availability of reference
clocks. If the GPS reference clock delivered by the USU is faulty and the GPS reference clock
configured for the BBUs is available, the BBUs automatically synchronize their clock with
the configured GPS reference clock.
Two GPS reference clocks can be configured for two separate BBUs. The two GPS reference
clocks work in active/standby mode. If the active GPS reference clock becomes faulty, BBUs
automatically synchronize their clock with the standby GPS reference clock.

Enhancement
Enhancement in eRAN11.1:
In USU3910-based centralized Cloud BB scenarios, two clock sources working in mutual
backup mode are supported, which can be the GPS or RGPS clock for the BBU and the
IEEE1588 V2 clock for the second-level USU.

Dependency
This feature can be used only in centralized Cloud BB scenarios.
Only USU3910s allow the 1588v2 reference clock to be shared among BBUs.

4.1.9 TDLOFD-003016 Different Transport Paths based on QoS


Grade
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Summary
This feature provides a transmission networking solution that consists of different transport
paths to implement different QCI grades.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Improves QoE.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

 Improves network reliability.

Description
This feature provides two logical or physical paths set up between the eNodeB and the MME
or S-GW. The transmission network can be configured with two groups of different QCIs that
are allocated to two paths with different priorities. Services with a high QCI can be carried on
the high-priority path and services with a low QCI can be carried on the low-priority path.
This improves QoE.

Figure 4-4 Two paths configured between the eNodeB and the MME or S-GW

Different transport paths based on QoS grade can also improve network reliability. When one
path fails, the connection is released and new data traffic will be handed over to another path.
After the failed path recovers, the related traffic flow can again be transmitted over the
original path. Huawei eNodeBs support multiple OAM mechanisms to detect and handle path
failures, such as BFD, Ethernet OAM, Ping, ARP and SON.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
The S-GW must support two path configurations.

4.1.10 TDLOFD-001134 Virtual Routing and Forwarding


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
This feature allows eNodeBs to connect to different operator networks that may be configured
with the same internal IP addresses.

Benefits
This feature greatly reduces the capital expenditure (CAPEX) and OPEX of operators.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Description
In a wholesale scenario, an eNodeB connects to each retailer's network, for which the retailer
operator has deployed the NEs and independently planned internal IP addresses.
When different operator networks are configured with the same internal IP address, this
feature allows an eNodeB to connect to the networks. The eNodeB prevents the destination IP
address of each route from conflicting with others and independently forwards packets in each
routing area. In this way, this feature prevents IP address conflicts between networks without
changing the internal IP addresses.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
The EPC and transmission network must support virtual local area networks (VLANs).
This feature cannot support the UTRPc.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-003009 IPsec
 TDLOFD-003010 Public Key Infrastructure (PKI)
 TDLOFD-00301201 IP Performance Monitoring
 TDLOFD-00301302 IEEE1588 V2 Clock Synchronization
 TDLOFD-003017 S1 and X2 over IPv6
 TDLOFD-003024 IPsec for IPv6

4.1.11 TDLOFD-003017 S1 and X2 over IPv6


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN3.0.

Summary
Huawei eNodeBs support the IPv6 protocol on the S1 and X2 interfaces.

Benefits
IPv6 provides a significantly larger address space than IPv4. This expansion provides
flexibility in allocating addresses and routing traffic and reduces the number of network
address translations (NATs).
This feature allows eNodeBs to use the IPv6 protocol over the S1 and X2 interfaces so that
eNodeBs can provide services on IPv6 networks.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Description
An eNodeB connects to the EPC through the S1 interface. Two eNodeBs are connected
through the X2 interface. Both interfaces are based on a full IP transport stack with no
dependency on the legacy SS7 network as used in GSM or UMTS networks. In addition to
supporting the S1 and X2 interfaces over the IPv4 protocol stack, this feature allows eNodeBs
to support the S1 and X2 interfaces over the IPv6 protocol stack.

Figure 4-5 S1 and X2 interfaces over the IPv6 protocol stack

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
Peer devices (such as the transmission network and core network) must support this feature.
This feature is not compatible with the feature TDLOFD-001134 Virtual Routing and
Forwarding.

4.1.12 TDLOFD-003024 IPsec for IPv6


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN3.0

Summary
IPsec ensures transmission security at the IP layer in both IPv4 and IPv6 environments,
including data transmitted on the S1 and X2 interface control and user planes, OM plane, and
synchronization plane.
This feature provides IPsec for the IPv6 protocol stack, ensuring data flow security from or to
eNodeBs.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

 Performs protection of confidentiality, integrity, and peer authentication and anti-replay


for data transmission based on the IPv6 protocol stack.
 Enhances the security of data transmitted over the non-trusted IPv6 transmission
network.

Description
IPsec is a protocol suite that secures Internet Protocol (IP) communications by authenticating
and encrypting each IP packet in a data stream. IPsec also includes protocols for establishing
mutual authentication between endpoints at the beginning of the session and negotiation of
cryptographic keys to be used during the session.
The key characteristics of IPsec for IPv6 are the same as IPsec for IPv4:
 Two encapsulation modes: transport mode and channel mode
 Two security protocols: Authentication Header (AH) and Encapsulation Security Payload
(ESP)
 Main encryption methods: NULL, Data Encryption Standard (DES), Triple Data
Encryption Standard (3DES), and Advanced Encryption Standard (AES)
 Main integrity protection methods: HMAC_SHA-1 and HMAC_MD5
HMAC stands for Hash message authentication code, SHA stands for secure hash
algorithm, and MD5 stands for message digest algorithm 5
IPsec for IPv6 was developed specifically for IPv6, and is mandatory in all
standard-compliant implementations of IPv6. However, IPv6 is an optional extension of IPv4.
When the network equipment (such as the host or SeGW) supports IPv6, IPsec for IPv6
protects data flows between a pair of hosts (such as the client and server), between a pair of
SeGWs (such as routers or firewalls), or between an SeGW and a host. SeGW stands for
security gateway.
In an LTE network, IPsec for IPv6 protects one or more data flows between two eNodeBs,
between the eNodeB and S-GW or MME, or between the SeGW and eNodeB.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
Peer devices, such as the S-GW and MME, must support the IPv6 protocol and this feature.
This feature is not compatible with the feature TDLOFD-001134 Virtual Routing and
Forwarding.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

4.2 Security
4.2.1 TDLOFD-001010 Security Mechanism
4.2.1.1 TDLOFD-00101001 Encryption: AES

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
This feature provides confidentiality protection for both signaling and user data between
eNodeBs and UEs.

Benefits
This feature prevents signaling data and user data from being illegally intercepted and
modified.

Description
The eNodeB provides encryption for RRC signaling and user data. The encryption function
consists of ciphering and deciphering and is performed at the Packet Data Convergence
Protocol (PDCP) layer. After receiving the UE context from the EPC, the eNodeB initiates the
initial security activation procedure. During RRC connection setup, an encryption algorithm is
selected and an encryption key is generated based on the RRC protocol. All radio bearers use
the encryption algorithm and key. For example, the configuration is used for the radio bearers
carrying signaling data as well as for those carrying user data.
The encryption algorithm can be changed by a handover. The encryption key can be changed
by a handover or RRC connection setup. The encryption keys for a UE in
RRC_CONNECTED mode may be changed by a handover procedure.
LTE TDD eRAN1.0 supports the AES encryption algorithm.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support the same encryption algorithm as the eNodeB.

4.2.1.2 TDLOFD-00101002 Encryption: SNOW 3G

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Summary
This feature provides confidentiality protection for both signaling and user data between
eNodeBs and UEs.

Benefits
This feature prevents signaling data and user data from being illegally intercepted and
modified.

Description
The eNodeB provides encryption for RRC signaling and user data. The encryption function
consists of ciphering and deciphering and is performed at the PDCP layer. After receiving the
UE context from the EPC, the eNodeB initiates the initial security activation procedure.
During RRC connection setup, an encryption algorithm is selected and an encryption key is
generated based on the RRC protocol. All radio bearers use the encryption algorithm and key.
For example, the configuration is used for the radio bearers carrying signaling data as well as
for those carrying user data.
The encryption algorithm can be changed by a handover. The encryption key can be changed
by a handover or RRC connection setup. The encryption keys for a UE in
RRC_CONNECTED mode may be changed by a handover procedure.
LTE TDD eRAN1.1 supports the encryption algorithm SNOW3G with 128 bit keys.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support the same encryption algorithm as the eNodeB.

4.2.1.3 TDLOFD-00101003 Encryption: ZUC

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
This feature provides confidentiality protection for both signaling and user data between
eNodeBs and UEs.

Benefits
This feature prevents signaling data and user data from being illegally intercepted and
modified.

Description
The eNodeB provides encryption for RRC signaling and user data. The encryption function
consists of ciphering and deciphering and is performed at the PDCP layer. After receiving the

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

UE context from the EPC, the eNodeB initiates the initial security activation procedure.
During RRC connection setup, an encryption algorithm is selected and an encryption key is
generated based on the RRC protocol. All radio bearers use the encryption algorithm and key.
The encryption algorithm can be changed by a handover. The encryption key can be changed
by a handover or RRC connection setup. The encryption keys for a UE in
RRC_CONNECTED mode may be changed by a handover procedure.
The ZUC algorithm is a word-oriented stream ciphering algorithm. It uses a 128-bit initial key
and a 128-bit initial vector (IV) as input, and then provides a key stream of 32-bit words,
where each 32-bit word is called a keyword. This key stream can be used for ciphering and
deciphering.
eRAN6.0 supports the ZUC algorithm.

Enhancement
None

4.2.2 TDLOFD-003009 IPsec


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
IPsec is used to protect, authenticate, and encrypt data flow for necessary security between
two NEs at the IP layer.

Benefits
This feature provides the security mechanism, confidentiality, integrity, and authentication
between two NEs at the IP layer.

Description
Figure 4-6 illustrates IPsec.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Figure 4-6 IPsec

IPsec provides a framework of open standards dealing with data confidentiality, integrity, and
authentication between two NEs. IPsec provides these security services at the IP layer. It uses
IKEV1 and IKEV2 for negotiation of protocols and algorithms based on the local policy and
to generate the encryption and authentication keys used by IPsec. IKE stands for Internet Key
Exchange.
IPsec protects one or more data flows between two eNodeBs, between the eNodeB and S-GW
or MME, or between the SeGW and eNodeB.
The key characteristics of IPsec are as follows:
 Two encapsulation modes: transport mode and channel mode
 Two security protocols: AH and ESP
 Main encryption methods: NULL, DES, 3DES, and AES
 Main integrity protection methods: HMAC_SHA-1 and HMAC_MD5

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The SeGW must be deployed.
This feature cannot be used with TDLOFD-001134 Virtual Routing & Forwarding.

4.2.3 TDLOFD-081211 eNodeB Supporting IPsec Redirection


Availability
This feature is applicable to macro eNodeBs from LTE TDD eRAN8.1.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Summary
This feature supports deploying the IPsec redirection function on the network. When the
IKEv2 redirection function is enabled for the eNodeB and SeGW, the SeGW decides whether
to continue to provide services for the eNodeB or initiate a redirection to a new SeGW
according to the redirection policy. If the eNodeB receives a redirection packet from the
SeGW, the eNodeB initiates IKE negotiation with a new SeGW and establishes a new IPsec
tunnel.

Benefits
 Easier SeGW capacity expansion and lower network configuration complexity
 Higher SeGW reliability

Description
This feature allows redirecting an eNodeB from the serving security gateway to the target one
if the load decision conditions are met or if maintenance is required, so as to improve IPsec
tunnel reliability.
This feature enables an eNodeB to implement IKE negotiation with different SeGWs using
the same IKE configuration and to establish an IPsec tunnel, thereby simplifying SeGW
network configuration and reducing network configuration complexity.
This feature has the following characteristics:
 Compatible with the RFC 5685 protocol, the eNodeB can only serve as an initiator.
 Supports initiating a redirection during the IKEv2 Initial exchange phase and
IKE_AUTH exchange phase for IKEv2.
 During the redirection, the eNodeB supports indicating the target SeGW only through
IPV4.
 Supports setting the maximum number of redirections within five minutes so as to
eliminate the possibility that the eNodeB cannot provide services normally because it is
repeatedly redirected due to a configuration error or a malicious attack.
 IPsec redirection is not supported when an IPsec link is established using DHCP.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 eNodeB
The eNodeB must be configured with the UMPT, UMDU, LMPT, or UTRPc board to
support this feature.
 UE
None
 Transport Network
The SeGW must support RFC 5685 IKEv2 Redirect and IPsec SA-based internal
dynamic route generation.
 CN
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

 OSS
None
 Other Features
Prerequisite Feature: TDLOFD-003009 IPsec.
 Others
None

4.2.4 TDLOFD-003010 Public Key Infrastructure (PKI)


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Summary
PKI provides digital certificate authentication, which is applied to IPsec tunnels between the
eNodeB and SeGW, and SSL channels between the eNodeB and OMC.

Benefits
This feature improves network security.

Description
PKI is a framework to manage digital certificates, which are used to provide authentication
between two NEs.
Digital certificate management involves creating, storing, distributing, and revoking
certificates, and distributing the certificate revocation list (CRL).
In general, a PKI system includes the Certificate Authority (CA), Certificate Repository (CR),
CRL server, and users to be authenticated. The eNodeB and SeGW are users of the PKI
system. The eNodeB interacts with the CA, CR and CRL server with assistance from the
U2000.
The eNodeB supports the certificate reserved prior to delivery. The certificate format
complies with X.509 V3. After the eNodeB is working properly, it supports certificate
replacement.
Figure 4-7 shows an illustration of the eRAN certificate application scenario.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Figure 4-7 eRAN certificate application scenario

In LTE TDD eRAN2.0, the eNodeB can update digital certificates automatically on the
U2000.
In LTE TDD eRAN2.1, this feature is enhanced to support automatic certificate distribution
using CMPv2. When CMPv2 is introduced to establish a direct tunnel from the eNodeB to the
CA, certificate enrollment and update can be automatically performed, and eNodeB certificate
issuing and update are more efficient if a large number of eNodeBs have been deployed.
The Certificate Management Protocol (CMP) is an Internet protocol used for X.509 digital
certificate creation and management in PKI.
An eNodeB can utilize CMP to obtain certificates from the CA. This procedure involves the
following CMP message:
1. initial registration/certification
2. key pair update
3. certificate update
The CMP message cross-certification request helps a CA to obtain a certificate signed by
another CA.
CMP messages are encapsulated in HTTP/HTTPs messages for transmission.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
Peer devices must support this feature.
This feature cannot be used with TDLOFD-001134 Virtual Routing & Forwarding.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

4.2.5 TDLOFD-081206 eNodeB Supporting Multi-operator PKI


Availability
This feature is applicable to macro eNodeBs from LTE TDD eRAN8.1.

Summary
This feature applies to RAN Sharing scenarios so as to securely isolate the services of each
operator. After this feature is enabled, if each operator deploys its own PKI server, the
eNodeB can load and manage the device certificates issued by multiple PKI servers. The
eNodeB establishes an independent security tunnel for each operator based on their respective
device certificates, so as to achieve the secure isolation of each operator's services.

Benefits
In RAN Sharing scenarios, if each operator deploys its own PKI server, this feature provides
an independent security tunnel for each operator so as to achieve the secure isolation of each
operator's services.

Description
The eNodeB supports loading and managing device certificates and CRL files issued by
multiple PKI servers. The following actions are involved:
 Certificate application: Each operator uses a Huawei-issued device certificate to apply to
its own PKI server for a certificate, and the eNodeB establishes an independent IPsec
tunnel for each operator. As shown in Figure 4-8, operator A's PKI server issues
certificate A to the eNodeB, and operator B's PKI server issues certificate B to the
eNodeB. Then, the eNodeB establishes IPsec tunnels A and B for operators A and B,
respectively.
 Certificate update: Similarly, each operator's PKI server issues an updated certificate.
 Certificate revocation: Similarly, each operator's PKI server can revoke a certificate.
 CRL file management: Similarly, the eNodeB can obtain the CRL file on each server.
The eNodeB then independently manages each certificate file.
To securely isolate the services of operators, the eNodeB can use their respective device
certificates to establish a dedicated IPsec tunnel for each operator.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Figure 4-8 eNodeB Supporting Multi-operator PKI

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 eNodeB
The eNodeB must be configured with the UMPT, UMDU, LMPT, or UTRPc board to
support this feature.
 UE
None
 Transport Network
Multiple PKI servers must be deployed in the network.
 CN
None
 OSS
None
 Other Features
None
 Others
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

4.2.6 TDLOFD-003014 Integrated Firewall


4.2.6.1 TDLOFD-00301401 Access Control List (ACL)

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Summary
ACL is comprised of a series of access control rules. eNodeBs perform packet filtering based
on the ACL.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Helps protect eNodeBs from some attacks.
 Helps eNodeBs identify specific types of packets, which must be encrypted and
authenticated by IPsec.

Description
The system operates based on the rules in ACL.
By using the ACL, an eNodeB performs packet filtering according to packet attributes such as
source IP addresses, destination IP addresses, source port numbers and destination port
numbers. Packet filtering can also be performed based on the type of service (TOS), DSCP,
and address wildcard.
By using the ACL, operators can select data flows that must be encrypted and authenticated
by IPsec, which is applied to guarantee data flow security.
In eRAN3.0, the layer-2 filter implements ACL. At layer 2, ACL rules will filter packages by
VLAN IDs. The eNodeB can identify the VLAN IDs of the packages, and only packages with
the correct VLAN ID will be allowed.
In eRAN3.0, eNodeBs support IPsec for IPv6 on the data flows selected based on the ACL.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

4.2.6.2 TDLOFD-00301402 Access Control List (ACL) autogeneration

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN7.0.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Summary
This feature automatically creates access control list (ACL) rules for operation and
maintenance (O&M) data, service data, signaling data, data from the Certificate Authority
(CA), data from the security gateway (SeGW), and clock data. The automatic ACL rule
creation simplifies whitelist configuration for the packet filtering function.

Benefits
This feature reduces the complexity of configuring the packet filtering function.

Description
This feature works as follows:
Enables the eNodeB to obtain the IP address and port number of the peer NE from the O&M
link, service link, signaling link, CA, SeGW, and clock objects. Using the IP address and port
number, this feature automatically creates ACL rules for the data of these objects. These
automatically created ACL rules can ensure that the eNodeB provides basic services.
Updates related ACL rules when information about these objects changes.
When an O&M function is enabled at the peer end, not at the local end, the eNodeB cannot
obtain the IP address of a maintenance packet. To ensure information security, ACL rules for
maintenance data must be manually created, even if an O&M function is enabled at both ends.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 Dependency on the hardware of a base station controller
None
 Dependency on eNodeB hardware
None
 Dependency on the UE
None
 Dependency on other NEs
None
 Dependency on the CN
None
 Dependency on other eRAN features
None

4.2.7 TDLOFD-003015 Access Control based on 802.1x


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Summary
eNodeBs support authentication on the transmission network using IEEE 802.1x (Port-Based
Network Access Control). Authentication is performed based on the device certificate.

Benefits
This feature provides digital certificate authentication between the eNodeB and LAN switch,
improving network security.

Description
IEEE 802.1x (Port-Based Network Access Control) uses the physical access characteristics of
IEEE 802 LAN infrastructures to provide a method of authenticating and authorizing devices
attached to a LAN port that has point-to-point connection characteristics. IEEE 802.1x also
prevents access to that port if the authentication and authorization process fails.
IEEE802.1x authentication and authorization use the framework of Extensible Authentication
Protocol (EAP), and are performed for the eNodeB, LAN switch, and AAA server (RADIUS
server).

Figure 4-9 eRAN 802.1x application scenario

Before the authentication and authorization process is complete, only Extensible


Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPoL) packets can cross the LAN switch. All other
packets will be discarded by the LAN switch.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
Peer devices must support IEEE 802.1x.
This feature requires TDLOFD-003010 Public Key Infrastructure (PKI).

4.2.8 TDLOFD-070211 IPsec Redundancy among Multi-SeGWs


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN7.0.
This feature is available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.0.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Summary
This feature uses the dead peer detection function to monitor the state of the IPsec tunnel
between an eNodeB and an SeGW. If the SeGW becomes faulty, this feature establishes a
temporary IPsec tunnel between the eNodeB and another SeGW, thereby improving the
reliability of secure networks.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Quick service recovery
 Improved reliability of secure networks
 Reduced economic losses for operators

Description
This feature works as follows:
1. When an eNodeB detects that an IPsec tunnel between it and the active SeGW is faulty, the
eNodeB attempts to initiate an IKE negotiation with each standby SeGW, sequentially, until
the eNodeB establishes a temporary IPsec tunnel. Then, the eNodeB switches its services to
the temporary tunnel.
2. If the IPsec tunnel between the eNodeB and the active SeGW is restored, the eNodeB
switches the services back to the IPsec tunnel and removes the temporary tunnel.
This feature applies to intra- or inter-city secure networks.

Enhancement
 SRAN11.1
When this feature is enabled, the eNodeB attempts to establish a standby IPsec tunnel
with a standby SeGW if the active IPsec tunnel between the base station and the active
SeGW is faulty. The eNodeB may initiate IKE negotiations with all standby SeGWs at
the same time. To avoid this situation, two parameters are added: IPSec Redundancy
Switchover Wait Time and IPSec Redundancy Switchover Random Delay Time. The
IPSec Redundancy Switch Back Random Time parameter allows for a random delay
before the eNodeB switches back to the active SeGW.

Dependency
 eNodeB
Only the Ethernet ports on the UMPT, LMPT, and UTRPc support this feature.
 UE
None
 Other NEs
Multiple SeGWs are deployed on a network, and routes from the eNodeB to these
SeGWs are all reachable.
 Core network
None
 Other features

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

This feature is mutually exclusive with TDLOFD-001134 Virtual Routing and


Forwarding.
This feature is dependent on TDLOFD-003009 IPsec.

4.2.9 TDLOFD-070212 eNodeB Supporting PKI Redundancy


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN7.0.
Applicable to Micro from LTE TDD eRAN8.0

Summary
This feature supports deploying one active and one standby PKI server on a network. If a
session between the eNodeB and active PKI server fails, the eNodeB automatically reinitiates
a session with the standby PKI server.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Prevents certificate applications and updates as well as CRL acquisitions from being
affected by active server failures
 Prevents link failures caused by certificate-related problems
 Improves the reliability of PKI-based secure networks

Description
In PKI redundancy, you must deploy one active and one standby PKI server on a network and
ensure that they synchronize certificate management data between them. If a session between
an eNodeB and the active PKI server fails, the eNodeB automatically reinitiates a session with
the standby PKI server to continue to apply for and update a certificate and obtain a CRL. The
following figure illustrates how this feature works.

Figure 4-10 How this feature works

Enhancement
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Dependency
 Dependency on eNodeB hardware
The UMPT, LMPT, or UTRPc must be configured to support this feature.
 Dependency on UEs
None
 Dependency on other NEs
One active and one standby PKI server must be deployed on a network.
 Dependency on the CN
None
 Dependency on other eRAN features
− This feature and the TDLOFD-001134 Virtual Routing and Forwarding feature are
mutually exclusive.
− This feature is dependent on the TDLOFD-003010 Public Key Infrastructure (PKI)
feature.

Professional Services
This feature should be used with Huawei professional services for eRAN network design.

4.3 Reliability
4.3.1 TDLOFD-001018 S1-flex
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Summary
This feature is part of the MME pool solution, which must be supported by both the eNodeB
and the MME. It allows an eNodeB to connect to multiple MMEs simultaneously.
In LTE TDD eRAN2.0, Huawei eNodeBs support a maximum of 16 S1 interfaces. One S1
interface can be connected to one or more MMEs.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Increased S1 interface flexibility.
 Increases overall usage of the MME pool capacity.
 Improves the performance of load sharing across MMEs in a pool.
 Prevents unnecessary EPC signaling when the UE moves within the MME pool area.
The served MME of the UE does not change.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Description
Figure 4-11 illustrates the topology between MME pools and eNodeBs.

Figure 4-11 Topology between MME pools and eNodeBs

When an eNodeB connects to an MME pool, the eNodeB must determine which MME in the
pool will receive UE signaling:
 If the UE sends the MME information in an RRC signaling message, the eNodeB will
select the MME based on this information.
 If the UE does not send the MME information or the registered MME is not connected to
the eNodeB, the eNodeB will select an MME in one of the following ways:
− Topology-based MME pool selection
The MME is selected based on the network topology to reduce the possibility of
MME switching during mobility.
− Load-based MME selection
The MME is selected based on its capacity and load. The eNodeB can be informed
of MME capacity during S1 setup. When an MME is overloaded, the eNodeB will
limit new UE assignments to the MME according to overload action information,
which the MME sends to the eNodeB when overload starts.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN6.0, the priority-based MME selection method is added. When MMEs or
the S1 interfaces to MMEs are assigned different priorities, the MME with the highest priority
is preferentially selected. If multiple MMEs have the highest priority, the MME with the
lowest load among them is preferentially selected. An MME with a low priority is selected
only when all high-priority MMEs are faulty or overloaded.

Dependency
The MME must support the MME pool function.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

4.3.2 TDLOFD-003004 Ethernet OAM


4.3.2.1 TDLOFD-00300401 Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.3ah)

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
Ethernet OAM (IEEE 803.3ah) provides fault isolation and troubleshooting capabilities for
point-to-point (P2) Ethernet services.

Benefits
Ethernet OAM is available between two directly connected devices.

Description
Ethernet OAM is a protocol at the MAC layer. This protocol facilitates the operation,
administration, and maintenance (OAM) of Ethernet.
Ethernet OAM includes IEEE 802.3ah and 802.1ag.
 802.3ah supports P2P OAM between two directly connected devices.
 802.1ag provides the E2E OAM function.
The basic functions supported by IEEE 802.3ah are as follows:
 Discovery: OAM session setup procedure. A device periodically sends OAM protocol
data units (PDUs) to check whether its peer device supports IEEE 802.3ah.
 Remote failure indication: A device sends OAM PDUs to inform its peer device of faults
when detected. Faults may include a link fault, dying gasp, or critical event.
 Link monitoring: A device supports link bit error rate (such as error frame and error
signal) monitoring. When the error rate exceeds a threshold, the device reports the event
to the peer device by sending OAM PDUs.
 Remote loopback: A sends a loopback control PDU, instructing the peer device to loop
back. Loopback helps locate the fault and test link quality.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
Peer devices must support IEEE802.3ah.
Ethernet interfaces are used.
This feature cannot be used with TDLOFD-001134 Virtual Routing and Forwarding.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

4.3.2.2 TDLOFD-00300403 Ethernet OAM (Y.1731)

Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
Ethernet OAM (ITU Y.1731) provides E2E performance monitoring functions that allow
operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) staff to measure different performance
counters. It also provides fault management functions (including continuity check) that
comply with the IEEE 802.1ag protocol.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Allows operators to monitor transmission quality and layer-2 network performance.
 Helps operators to quickly identify layer-2 connection and performance faults.
 Provides more information about network performance, which helps operators to
determine whether to upgrade the network.

Description
The Ethernet OAM (ITU Y.1731) protocol defines fault management and performance
monitoring functions.
This section describes only the performance monitoring function. The fault management
function defined in the ITU Y.1731 protocol complies with the IEEE 802.1ag protocol.
Ethernet OAM (ITU Y.1731) performance monitoring measures Ethernet performance
counters including the frame loss ratio, frame delay and frame delay variation.
This feature establishes an E2E detection session to monitor Ethernet performance counters
based on the following services:
 Ethernet frame loss measurement (ETH-LM) collects counter values applying to ingress
and egress service frames. The counters maintain a count of transmitted and received
data frames between a pair of maintenance association end points (MEPs).
 Ethernet delay measurement (ETH-DM) can be used for an on-demand OAM to measure
frame delay and frame delay variation. ETH-DM can be performed in two directions,
called two-way ETH-DM. Two-way ETH-DM is recommended because one-way
ETH-DM requires clock synchronization between two MEPs.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
Peer devices and core networks must comply with ITU Y.1731.
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

4.3.3 TDLOFD-003005 OM Channel Backup


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
This feature allows an eNodeB to use an alternative OM channel if the primary OM channel is
faulty.

Benefits
This feature ensures OM channel reliability.

Description
In the OM channel backup solution, there are two OM channels: primary and secondary. Each
channel is configured with an OM IP address. In general, only the primary channel is
activated. When the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel is activated.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The peer devices (transmission network and core network) must support this feature.

4.3.4 TDLOFD-003006 IP Route Backup


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
This feature allows an eNodeB to use an alternative IP route if the primary IP route is faulty.

Benefits
This feature ensures reliability at the IP layer.

Description
Two IP routes can be configured with the same destination IP address but different next-hop
addresses and priorities. The route with the higher priority is usually activated. When this
route is faulty, the route with the lower priority will be activated (for example, through
network ping).

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Enhancement
None

Dependency
Peer devices must support this feature.

4.3.5 TDLOFD-003007 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Summary
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) is used to detect faults on IP routes.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Detects network faults.
 Achieves high reliability and availability of Ethernet services.
 Helps service providers to provide Ethernet services in a cost-effective way.

Description
This feature periodically transmits BFD packets between two nodes to detect IP route
connectivity. If no BFD packet is received within a detection period, the connection is faulty
and related resumption actions will be automatically triggered, such as IP route switching, to
avoid link interruption. This feature can quickly detect the fault and can apply to telecom
services on IP networks.
eNodeBs support two BFD types:
 One-hop BFD
There is only one router on the IP path between two NEs.
One-hop BFD is used to detect gateway availability when a router is used.
 Multi-hop BFD
There is at least one router on the IP path between two NEs.
Multi-hop BFD is used to detect the connectivity between two NEs, for example, between two
eNodeBs, between the eNodeB and S-GW or MME, and between the eNodeB and transport
equipment.
The following figure illustrates one-hop and multi-hop BFD application scenarios.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Figure 4-12 One-hop and multi-hop BFD application scenarios

Enhancement
 eRAN11.1
BFD authentication performs security hardening on BFD. It is implemented in
eRAN11.1.
To initiate a BFD session between the eNodeB and the peer node, the authentication
information of each other is required. Once local and peer keys are different, the session
is terminated.
The eNodeB BFD authentication applies to one-hop BFD, not multi-hop BFD.
The session detection mechanism after BFD authentication and the processing after the
detection (for example, associating routes) are the same as those for BFD. Security
authentication ensures the consistency of both sides of the session and the message
integrity, and provides protection against replay.

Dependency
 Transport network
The peer equipment must support BFD.

4.3.6 TDLOFD-003008 Ethernet Link Aggregation (IEEE 802.3ad)


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.0.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Summary
This feature binds several Ethernet links to one logical link.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Enhances the reliability of Ethernet links between eNodeBs and transport equipment.
 Balances load on Ethernet links between the eNodeB and transport equipment and
increases the link bandwidth.

Description
Ethernet link aggregation is a protocol defined in IEEE 802.3ad.
IEEE 802.3ad defines the link aggregation control protocol (LACP) used to detect link status
in a link group.
The eNodeB supports static LACP, with parameters of a link group configured manually.
Fault detecting also uses the LACP.
Figure 4-13 illustrates Ethernet link aggregation.

Figure 4-13 Ethernet link aggregation

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
The transport equipment directly connected to eNodeBs must support this feature.
Ethernet interfaces are used.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

4.4 RAN Sharing


4.4.1 TDLOFD-001036 RAN Sharing with Common Carrier
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.2.

Summary
eNodeBs support multiple operators sharing the same RAN, where the operators use common
carriers on the same eNodeB.

Benefits
Operators can share RAN resources to reduce CAPEX and OPEX.

Description
In the multioperator core network (MOCN) sharing solution, RAN resources are shared,
including frequency and baseband resources, for all operators. Different operators share the
same cell and each eNodeB can connect to the core networks of all operators. The system
information broadcast in each shared cell contains the PLMN ID of each operator (up to four)
and a single TA code valid within all of the PLMNs sharing RAN resources.
All LTE UEs supporting MOCN can read a maximum of four PLMN IDs and select one at
initial attachment. UEs send the selected PLMN ID to the eNodeB. The eNodeB selects an
appropriate MME for a UE.
The MOCN network sharing solution supports the shared master OSS, which connects to
different network management systems (NMSs) through different interfaces.
The shared eNodeB and non-shared eNodeB can be connected to each other. In the shared
area, a UE can be handed over from one shared eNodeB to another. If the UE moves to a
non-shared area, the eNodeB selects an appropriate neighbor cell for the handover based on
certain principles (for example, the same operator's network may be preferentially considered).
Interworking between different RATs may be used during the handover.
In RAN sharing with common carrier mode, the following functions are available:
 Multiple PLMN IDs are broadcast on the common carrier and the core network is
separately deployed.
 The logo and name of an operator can be displayed on UEs.
 The shared OSS connects to different NMSs through Itf-N interferences.
 A maximum of four operators can share RAN resources.
Dynamic radio resource management was introduced.
This feature guarantees the fairness and flexibility of MOCN network sharing in both the
uplink and downlink. All radio resources can be shard dynamically and fairly between MOCN
operators. Any remaining resources can be used by other operators. In addition, this feature
balances the maximum system between MOCN operators.
Operators sharing a network may have different service and price models. The QoS
parameters may be completely different.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Without this feature, in high load situations, the operator with higher QoS services will
occupy more radio resources because the dynamic scheduling algorithm considers the QCI to
balance system throughput and user fairness.
With this feature, operator fairness is considered. The priority of each operator is calculated
according to the ratio of occupied RBs and the predefined ratio of each operator. Resources
are scheduled between the operators based on operator priorities, and then the resources for
one operator are scheduled within this operator.
The pre-emption algorithm in admission control is also enhanced in this feature. The service
provided by operator A can pre-empt the resources of the service provided by operator B only
when both of the following conditions are met:
The ratio of RBs occupied for the service provided by operator A is less than the predefined
ratio of operator A.
The ratio of RBs occupied for the service provided by operator B is greater than the
predefined ratio of operator B.
In eRAN3.0, multiple operators can share the MME and S1 link.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
If the MOCN or gateway core network (GWCN) is used, this feature requires
TDLOFD-001018 S1-flex.
This feature does not work when the eNodeB bandwidth is 5 MHz.

4.4.2 TDLOFD-001037 RAN Sharing with Dedicated Carrier


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.2.

Summary
eNodeBs support multiple operators sharing the same RAN, where the operators use
dedicated carriers on the same eNodeB.

Benefits
Operators can share RAN resources to reduce CAPEX and OPEX.

Description
Huawei eNodeBs support RAN sharing as a part of network sharing functions.
This feature allows multiple operators to share all eNodeB hardware resources. Different core
networks are separately connected to the same eNodeB. Multiple operators can cover the
same area by using their own frequencies in a single physical RAN. A TA must include
multiple shared cells.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Figure 4-14 illustrates the architecture in RAN sharing with dedicated carrier mode.

Figure 4-14 Architecture in RAN sharing with dedicated carrier mode

When a UE accesses a cell, the eNodeB selects the core network to which the UE must be
routed according to the original serving cell. If S1-flex is applied, the eNodeB may select an
MME node for the UE based on the globally unique MME identifier (GUMMEI), which is
part of the globally unique temporary identity (GUTI) of the UE.
The network sharing solution supports the shared master OSS, which connects to different
NMSs through different interfaces. Cell-level FM and PM data can be independent for all
operators.
The shared eNodeB and non-shared eNodeB can be connected to each other and a UE can be
handed over from a shared eNodeB to a non-shared eNodeB. When operators have dedicated
networks in the non-shared area, the UE can only be handed over to the same operator's
network. The target network of the same operator may not be an LTE network.
In RAN sharing with dedicated carrier mode, the following functions are available:
 Each operator broadcasts its own PLMN ID separately using its own carrier and within
its own core network.
 The logo and name of an operator can be displayed on UEs.
 Cell-level FM and PM data can be independent for all operators. The shared OSS
connects to different NMSs through Itf-N interferences.
 License management and feature activation and deactivation are performed
independently for operators.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
If the MOCN or GWCN is used, this feature requires TDLOFD-001018 S1-flex.
This feature does not work when the eNodeB bandwidth is 5 MHz.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

4.4.3 TDLOFD-081224 Hybrid RAN Sharing


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs and LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.

Summary
The flourishing of LTE networks calls for more diversity in RAN sharing. Additionally, RAN
sharing with common carriers and RAN sharing with dedicated carriers have their own
restrictions. For example, RAN sharing with common carriers requires that the cells under a
shared eNodeB must have the same primary PLMN ID, and RAN sharing with dedicated
carriers disallows multiple operators to share a cell. The Hybrid RAN Sharing feature
eliminates such restrictions by allowing multiple operators to share a cell and allowing shared
cells to have different primary PLMN IDs.

Benefits
Hybrid RAN Sharing curtails the capital expenditure (CAPEX) and operating expense (OPEX)
of operators by allowing flexible RAN sharing and accelerates the pace of network
deployment.

Description
Hybrid RAN Sharing allows operators to share RAN resources when all the following
conditions are met:
 Each eNodeB operates on two or more frequencies.
 At least one frequency is shared by operators.
 Two or more cells have different primary PLMN IDs.
The following are two typical application scenarios of Hybrid RAN Sharing:
 A shared eNodeB operates on both common and dedicated frequencies. For example,
operators A and B share frequency 1 (A being the primary operator), and operator B uses
a dedicated frequency (frequency 2), as shown in Figure 4-15.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Figure 4-15 Shared eNodeB operating on both common and dedicated frequencies

 Operators share different operating frequencies of an eNodeB. For example, operators A


and B share frequency 1 (A being the primary operator), and operators C and D share
frequency 2 (C being the primary operator), as shown in Figure 4-16 .

Figure 4-16 Operators sharing different frequencies

In Hybrid RAN Sharing scenarios, the eNodeB can be shared by up to four operators and
configured primary and secondary operator information for each cell. The procedure of user's
PLMN ID selection is as below:
1. eNodeB broadcast the primary and secondary PLMN ID in system information.
2. UE get the PLMN ID list in SIB1 of shared cell and select one proper PLMN as its
serving PLMN
3. eNodeB establish the connection to particular MME for a UE according to the PLMN ID
that UE selected.
In Hybrid RAN Sharing scenarios, related features, resources and OSS management follow
the policies below:

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

 The feature configuration of a shared cell must keep same between different operators,
which is same as MOCN cell.
 The allocation of cell-specific resources for a shared cell, such PRB resource, are same
as MOCN cell. The eNodeB-specific resources, such as RRC connected user number, are
shared by multiple operators.
 OSS is shared by multiple operators and connected to NMSs of different operators by
different Itf-N interface. The information such as configuration management, fault
management and performance management can be reported individually to different
NMS.
Hybrid RAN Sharing is compatible with RAN sharing with common carriers and RAN
sharing with dedicated carriers. Purchasing the license for Hybrid RAN Sharing eliminates the
need to purchase licenses for RAN sharing with common carriers and RAN sharing with
dedicated carriers.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 Other features
If a shared eNodeB is connected to multiple non-shared MMEs, TDLOFD-081224
Hybrid RAN Sharing is dependent on TDLOFD-001018 S1-flex. If a shared eNodeB is
connected to a shared MME, TDLOFD-081224 Hybrid RAN Sharing is not dependent
on any feature.

4.4.4 TDLOFD-001086 RAN Sharing by More Operators


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
A maximum of six operators can share an eNodeB in RAN sharing mode.

Benefits
More operators can share an eNodeB, greatly reducing operator CAPEX and OPEX.

Description
eNodeBs support two RAN sharing modes: RAN sharing with common carrier and RAN
sharing with dedicated carrier. In either mode, a maximum of six operators can share an
eNodeB and manage the eNodeB on the element management system (EMS). The EMS is
connected to the NMSs of the operators through northbound interfaces.
In RAN sharing with dedicated carrier mode, operators can share only eNodeB hardware. In
RAN sharing with common carriers mode, operators can share both eNodeB hardware and the
cells served by the eNodeB.
In RAN sharing with common carrier mode, the following functions are available:

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

 A shared eNodeB broadcasts system information block type 1 (SIB1) in each shared cell.
Each SIB1 contains a PLMN ID list and a common TA code. A PLMN ID list can
contain a maximum of six PLMN IDs.
 The logo and name of an operator can be displayed on UEs.
 A shared eNodeB can dynamically allocate radio resources to operators to ensure flexible
and fair resource scheduling.
Dynamic allocation is based on the following mechanisms:#li17489764
 Admission control based on the satisfaction of each type of service provided by the
operators
 Operator-specific load control
 Fair resource scheduling between the operators
 Resource allocation ratio configured for each operator
To improve resource usage, the resources that are allocated to but not used by an
operator can be shared by other operators.
 UEs can use the resources allocated by shared and non-shared eNodeBs.
A shared eNodeB can be connected to other shared eNodeBs and non-shared eNodeBs. When
a UE is moving between shared eNodeBs or between a shared eNodeB and a non-shared
eNodeB, the operator serving the UE remains unchanged.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires either of the following features:
 TDLOFD-001036 RAN Sharing with Common Carrier
 TDLOFD-001037 RAN Sharing with Dedicated Carrier

4.4.5 TDLOFD-001112 MOCN Flexible Priority Based Camping


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
In RAN sharing with common carriers mode, absolute cell-reselection priorities of
frequencies are broadcast in system information without distinguishing between operators.
With this feature, operator-specific cell-reselection priorities can be specified for intra- or
inter-RAT neighboring frequencies.

Benefits
This feature helps operators implement their customized camping policies for UEs in idle
mode.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Description
The cell-reselection priority of an intra- or inter-RAT neighboring frequency can be set for
different operators identified by PLMN IDs. If an operator-specific cell-reselection priority is
set, the priority is used as a dedicated priority of the frequency.
If dedicated priorities are set, the eNodeB filters frequencies based on the serving PLMN of
the UE and delivers the corresponding priority to the UE in the IE
IdleModeMobilityControlInfo in the RRC Connection Release message.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires TDLOFD-001036 RAN Sharing with Common Carrier.

4.4.6 TDLOFD-001133 Multi Operators SPID Policy


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.0.

Summary
eNodeBs support operator-specific subscriber profile ID for RAT/frequency priority (SPID)
policies so that UEs camp on different networks based on their cell reselection priorities.

Benefits
In RAN sharing scenarios, this feature allows operators to customize RRM policies, such as
the camping policies of UEs in idle mode. Operators can configure the same SPID range.

Description
An operator registers an SPID (a policy index ranging from 0 to 255) for UEs in a home
subscriber server (HSS) database. Based on the SPID, an eNodeB then performs service
processing dedicated to the UEs.
SPID policies can be customized for different operators on an eNodeB. Based on the serving
PLMNs and SPIDs of UEs, operators share the eNodeB, query eNodeB local configurations,
and enable the eNodeB to deliver the customized cell reselection policies to UEs.
This feature supports the cell reselection policies that are customized based only on SPIDs.
Different operators can register the same SPID for a UE and can also customize different cell
reselection policies on shared eNodeBs.

Enhancement
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

Dependency
This feature requires the following features:
 TDLBFD-00201803 Cell Selection and Re-selection
 TDLOFD-001054 Flexible User Steering

4.5 Advance Micro


4.5.1 TDLOFD-001057 Load Balancing based on Transport QoS
Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.1.

Summary
The transport capability of a micro eNodeB is weaker than that of a macro eNodeB. When the
service load on the micro eNodeB is high and the backhaul traffic is heavy, the transport
capability over the S1 interface may be insufficient. In this case, the micro eNodeB uses the
load balancing algorithm to hand over some of the UEs to the cells under other micro or
macro eNodeBs.

Benefits
This feature balances the transport load over an S1 interface to prevent congestion.

Description
This feature applies when the transport load over an S1 interface is heavy on a micro eNodeB
but is light on other eNodeBs due to different services and UEs.
The micro eNodeB measures the transport load over the S1 interface and at the same time
receives the load information of neighboring eNodeBs. Based on the measurement results and
received information, the micro eNodeB determines the transport load status. If the S1
interface transport load on the micro eNodeB exceeds the threshold and the S1 interface
transport load on the neighboring eNodeBs is light, the micro eNodeB hands over some UEs
to the cells under the neighboring eNodeBs.
The transport load over the S1 interface is the transmission bandwidth utilization.
Only inter-frequency load balancing is supported.
This feature is used when inter-frequency cells have overlapping coverage.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The X2 interface must be configured.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 4 Networking & Transmission & Security

This feature requires the following functions and feature:


 Load control function for obtaining the load information of neighboring cells
 Mobility management function for implementing handovers
 TDLOFD-001032 Intra-LTE Load Balancing
This feature only applies to micro eNodeBs.

4.5.2 TDLOFD-003022 PPPoE


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.1.

Summary
PPPoE is a network communication protocol for the data link layer and is used to encapsulate
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) frames into Ethernet frames. An eNodeB enabled with PPPoE
supports PPPoE authentication when the eNodeB accesses the EPC through a public network
(xPON or xDSL).

Benefits
With PPPoE, eNodeBs access and use operators' broadband networks as backhaul networks,
thereby saving the deployment cost of the backhaul networks.

Description
Ethernet networks are based on frames without security protection against IP and MAC
addresses, and DHCP servers. By using PPPoE, users can virtually dial from one device to
another over an Ethernet network, establish a point-to-point connection, and then securely
transmit data packets.
PPPoE can be integrated with the current dial-up AAA system where it fits perfectly into the
current ATM backbone networks. Compared with DHCP, PPPoE allows pre-paid traffic
bucket business models to obtain static IP addresses and guarantee QoS requirements more
easily.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature only applies to micro eNodeBs.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

5 O&M

5.1 SON
5.1.1 TDLOFD-002001 Automatic Neighbour Relation (ANR)
Availability
This feature is available as of LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
When this feature is enabled, the eNodeB uses algorithms to automatically plan and configure
neighbor relationships, resolving issues with incorrect neighbor relationship configuration.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Manual configuration is not required, reducing workload and OPEX.
 Missing or incorrect neighbor relationships can be identified or optimized, eliminating
handover failures caused by missing or incorrect neighbor relationship configuration.
 Physical cell identifier (PCI) conflict detection can be triggered.

Description
ANR can automatically add and update neighbor relationships in the neighboring relation
table (NRT). However, the manual configuration of NRT attributes, including No HO and No
Remove, have higher priority than the ANR algorithm. For example, if an operator sets the No
Remove attribute to true, ANR will not remove this record from the NRT.
Figure 5-1 shows the ANR procedure.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Figure 5-1 ANR procedure

The ANR process consists of the following steps:


1. The source eNodeB informs the UE which E-UTRA frequency needs to be measured.
2. The UE returns a measurement report regarding cell B. This report contains cell B's PCI
but does not include its global cell identity (GCI). When the eNodeB receives a UE
measurement report containing the PCI that is not included in the NRT for that cell, the
following sequence may be used.
3. The eNodeB instructs the UE to use the newly discovered PCI as the parameter to read
the GCI of the related neighboring cell. The eNodeB may schedule appropriate intervals
for the UE to read the GCI of the neighboring cell because the UE must decode the
broadcasted GCI of the new cell.
4. After the UE reads the GCI of the new cell, it reports the detected GCI to the serving
eNodeB.
5. The eNodeB determines that this neighbor relationship should be added and uses the PCI
and GCI to perform the following operations:
− Searches for a transport layer address to the new eNodeB. (OM or MME search
mechanisms have already been standardized by the 3GPP.)
− Updates its NRT.
The eNodeB or serving cell finds a new neighboring cell by using one of the following
methods:
 The PCI of the neighboring cell is reported to the eNodeB in the UE measurement report.
Then, the eNodeB instructs the UE to read the GCI of the new neighboring cell.
 The GCI of the neighboring cell is sent to the eNodeB in the UE history information of
the HANDOVER REQUEST, and then the eNodeB requests the PCI of the new
neighboring cell.
After the eNodeB adds the new neighboring cell, the PCI conflict detection procedure can be
activated. For details on PCI conflict detection, see TDLOFD-002007 PCI Collision Detection
& Self-Optimization.
If required, an X2 interface establishment can also be activated through the automatic
transport setup function in TDLOFD-002004 Self-configuration.
Periodic ANR is supported. Measurements are periodically performed to select and configure
UEs to report the strongest LTE cells. If a UE reports an unknown PCI, the eNodeB triggers
an ANR measurement to determine the corresponding GCI. Periodic ANR improves handover
performance.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN2.1, the ANR feature is enhanced with the log function.
Logs record key events during the SON process. Operators can use the log information to
perform queries, collect statistics, and analyze the feature running process and key events.
In LTE TDD eRAN6.1, eNodeBs support automatic setting of the NO HO attribute.
ANR can automatically identify the neighboring cells with a low handover success rate, and
set NoHoFlag to FORBID_HO_ENUM(Forbid Ho) to prohibit handovers to them. This
function reduces handover failures and thereby increases the handover success rate.
In LTE TDD eRAN8.1, this feature is enhanced with the following functions:
 Detection of neighboring cells for PCI confusion based on the handover success rate
The function of automatic optimization of the No HO attribute has been enhanced. The
eNodeB automatically instructs a UE to re-read the ECGI of a neighboring cell to which
the success rate of handovers from the local cell is low. After the UE reads the ECGI, if
the handover success rate keeps low, the eNodeB automatically sets the NoHoFlag
parameter to FORBID_HO_ENUM(Forbid Ho) for this neighboring cell. This prevents
such a neighboring cell from affecting the handover success rate of the overall network.
 Enhanced X2 automatic removal
 eNodeBs support automatic removal of faulty X2 interfaces and X2 interfaces with low
usage.
In LTE TDD eRAN11.1, eNodeBs support overshooting neighboring cell restriction.
An overshooting neighboring cell provides cell coverage larger than expected, which is
determined in terms of the topology based on longitudes and latitudes and cell radii of the
serving and neighboring cells.
In the live network, ANR adds a lot of overshooting neighboring cells because of RF planning
and unstable neighboring cell signals detected by UEs. This affects network maintenance and
handover performance. If overshooting neighboring cells are added to the NRTs, KPIs may
deteriorate. Overshooting neighboring cell restriction can detect overshooting neighboring
cells and manage them individually, avoiding them from being added to the NRTs. E-UTRAN
overshooting neighboring cell restriction can detect intra-RAT overshooting neighboring cells.

Dependency
This feature requires the OSS feature WOFD-180600 Automatic Neighbor Relation
Optimization - LTE.
UEs must support ANR and DRX.

5.1.2 TDLOFD-002002 Inter-RAT ANR


Availability
This feature is available as of LTE TDD eRAN3.0.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Summary
Inter-RAT ANR takes advantage of the eNodeB algorithm to plan, configure neighbor
relationships, and resolve issues of incorrect neighbor relationships of E-UTRAN cells with
GERAN or UTRAN cells.

Benefits
In an LTE system, inter-RAT neighbor relationships can be automatically added without
manual intervention, reducing operator OPEX.

Description
Inter-RAT ANR can automatically add neighbor relationships in the eNodeB based on
inter-RAT measurement results reported from UEs.
Inter-RAT coverage is broadcast in the E-UTRAN. Then, UEs can measure and report the
inter-RAT cells to the eNodeB and instruct it to build up inter-RAT neighbor relationships for
further inter-RAT mobility.
This feature includes the following functions:
 Measure UTRAN and GERAN cells
 Add the neighbor relationships of E-UTRAN with inter-RAT cells to the eNodeB.
 Configure the constraints between the E-UTRAN and inter-RAT cells (for example,
operator-specific mobility limitation policy)
The following figure shows the inter-RAT ANR procedure.

Figure 5-2 Inter-RAT ANR procedure

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

It is assumed that inter-RAT ANR is executed by using the U2000 client, which can manage
the followings:
 Inter-RAT/frequency search list: A list of RATs or frequencies that must be searched.
 Inter-RAT/frequency ANR blacklist: A list of cells that cannot be included in the eNodeB
inter-RAT/frequency neighboring cell lists.
It is also assumed that the OM system is informed about changes in the eNodeB
inter-RAT/frequency neighboring cell lists.
The serving cell A has been enabled with the ANR function. During a normal call procedure,
the eNodeB instructs each UE to perform measurements and search inter-RAT/frequency cells.
The eNodeB may use different policies for instructing the UE to perform and report
measurements.
1. The eNodeB instructs the UE to search neighboring cells in the target RATs/frequencies.
The eNodeB may schedule appropriate gaps so that the UE can scan all cells in the target
RATs/frequencies.
2. The UE reports the PCI of the detected cells in the target RATs/frequencies along with
their respective signal quality. The carrier frequency and primary scrambling code (PSC)
define the PCI of the detected cell if a UTRAN cell is detected. The band Indicator,
BSIC, and BCCH ARFCN define the PCI of the detected cell if a GERAN cell is
detected.
The eNodeB instructs the UE to use the newly detected Phy-CID as a parameter and to
read the Global-CID of the detected neighboring cell in the target RAT/frequency.
3. The eNodeB may schedule appropriate gaps for the UE to read the Global-CID from the
broadcast channel of the detected neighboring cell.
4. After reading the Global-CID of the new cell, the UE reports the detected Global-CID to
the serving eNodeB.
The eNodeB updates its inter-RAT/frequency neighboring cell lists.
Periodic inter-RAT ANR is supported. Measurements are periodically performed to select and
configure UEs to report the strongest LTE cells or report the strongest cells for inter-RAT
SON. If a UE reports an unknown layer-1 cell identity (PCI, PSC, and BSIC), the eNodeB
triggers an inter-RAT ANR measurement to identify the corresponding GCI. Periodic
inter-RAT ANR improves handover performance.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN8.0, optimize the neighborhood selection function between UTRAN and
LTE TDD system.
 Handover: Acquire neighborhood priority according the number of measured times
 Redirection: Sequencing neighborhood according the priority selection
In LTE TDD eRAN11.1, eNodeBs support overshooting neighboring cell restriction.
An overshooting neighboring cell provides cell coverage larger than expected, which is
determined in terms of the topology based on longitudes and latitudes and cell radii of the
serving and neighboring cells.
In the live network, ANR adds a lot of overshooting neighboring cells because of RF planning
and unstable neighboring cell signals detected by UEs. This affects network maintenance and
handover performance. If overshooting neighboring cells are added to the NRTs, KPIs may
deteriorate. Overshooting neighboring cell restriction can detect overshooting neighboring

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

cells and manage them individually, avoiding them from being added to the NRTs. UTRAN
overshooting neighboring cell restriction can detect overshooting UTRAN neighboring cells.

Dependency
This feature requires the OSS feature WOFD-181400 Inter-RAT Automatic Neighbor Relation
Optimization-LTE.
UEs must support ANR and DRX.

5.1.3 TDLOFD-002004 Self-configuration


Availability
This feature is available as of LTE TDD eRAN1.0.

Summary
This feature enables an eNodeB to automatically establish an operation and maintenance
(O&M) link, obtain the configuration data file and software from the element management
system (EMS), and then activate the configuration data file and software. The configuration
data file contains radio parameters and transport parameters. After that, the eNodeB performs
a self-test and reports the test result to the EMS.
After the configuration data file and software are downloaded, the U2000 or LMT
automatically starts a comprehensive self-test procedure on the eNodeB. After the test is
complete, the U2000 or LMT can obtain a test report.

Benefits
Only hardware installation needs to be performed by field engineers for initial eNodeB
startup.

Description
When the eNodeB is powered on, it obtains the required data to establish an O&M link, such
as the O&M IP address of the eNodeB, subnet mask, IP address of the EMS, and IP address of
the security gateway (SeGW), through the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
server. After the O&M link is established, the eNodeB automatically downloads and activates
the configuration data file and software according to the instruction from the EMS. Then, the
eNodeB performs a self-test to ensure that it is ready to provide services and reports the test
result to the EMS.
After the configuration data file and software are downloaded, the U2000 or LMT
automatically starts a comprehensive self-test procedure on the eNodeB. After the test is
complete, the U2000 or LMT obtains a test report, indicating the eNodeB status.
The test report contains the following information:
 eNodeB basic information, such as the type, name, mobile network code (MNC), mobile
country code (MCC), and electrical serial number
 Software version information
 Board status information, such as information about the baseband processing units and
RRUs

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

 Transport status information (physical layer and data link layer)


 Clock status
 Cell status
 Ambient temperature and relative humidity

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN1.0, the eNodeB can automatically establish an IPsec link with the SeGW
during self-configuration.
In LTE TDD eRAN1.0, if the eNodeB is equipped with a GPS device, it can obtain
geographical information from the GPS device and report it to the EMS. The EMS will
automatically identify the eNodeB by comparing the received geographical information with
the predefined geographical information.
In LTE TDD eRAN1.0, automatic transport setup is supported. The eNodeB has three types of
transport-related interfaces: S1 interface, X2 interface, and O&M channel interface.
Accordingly, the eNodeB provides three automatic transport setup processes: S1 self-setup,
X2 self-setup, and O&M channel self-setup. Figure 5-3 illustrates the general network
topology.

Figure 5-3 General network topology

RAN Network Element Manager: RAN network element management platform

The eNodeB parameters (such as the MAC address, local O&M IP address, unique ID, and
security key) have been pre-configured in the factory or other places and therefore do not
need to be manually configured or modified.
The automatic transport setup procedure is as follows:

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

 When the eNodeB is powered on, it automatically negotiates with the peer device about
Layer-1 or 2 (physical or MAC layer) parameters, such as duplex mode. The peer device
can be a LAN switch, router, or another eNodeB.
 The eNodeB receives O&M channel parameters from the DHCP server, for example, the
Internet IP address, network element manager (NEM) IP address, and SeGW IP address.
 The eNodeB establishes an IPsec tunnel with the SeGW, obtains the internal IP address,
and then establishes the O&M channel with the NEM.
 After the configuration data file and software are downloaded and activated, the eNodeB
receives the necessary S1 interface transmission parameters from the NEM, such as the
eNodeB service IP address and MME SCTP link IP address.
 The eNodeB starts the S1 self-setup procedure and establishes the S1 interface.
X2 interface self-setup based on automatic neighbor relation (ANR) is supported. An eNodeB
can identify a new eNodeB with which the neighbor relationship is not configured. After
receiving necessary transport data from the NEM, the eNodeB automatically establishes the
X2 interface with this new neighboring eNodeB.
In LTE TDD eRAN11.0, the eNodeB can obtain the MME IP address from the domain name
server (DNS) and complete S1-C link self-configuration, simplifying eNodeB operations in
MME deployment and relocation scenarios and improving O&M efficiency.

Dependency
The X2 self-setup function in this feature requires ANR.

5.1.4 TDLOFD-002007 PCI Collision Detection &


Self-Optimization
Availability
This feature is available in LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
This feature detects PCI conflicts using ANR and performs self-optimization in the EMS to
resolve these conflicts.

Benefits
This feature reduces OPEX.

Description
PCI is a physical cell identifier or layer-1 identifier. It is an essential configuration parameter
to E-UTRAN cells. It corresponds to a unique combination of one orthogonal sequence and
one pseudo-random sequence. In the LTE system, there are only 504 PCIs that can be
repeatedly used. The two cells that share a PCI cannot be geographically close to each other.
Otherwise, they will interfere with each other.
PCIs are used to transmit data in a cell. When a new eNodeB is delivered to the site, a PCI
must be selected for each cell of the eNodeB. This selection avoids PCI conflicts between a
serving cell and its neighboring cells. PCI conflicts cause interference, and therefore affect
services. The PCI assignment must meet the following conditions:

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

 Collision-free: The PCI is unique in the coverage area of a cell.


 Confusion-free: A cell must not have neighboring cells with an identical PCI.
Whenever the new neighbor relationship is added by the eNodeB, the PCI conflict detection
procedure is triggered to check the possible PCI conflicts within the neighboring cells.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN2.1, PCI conflict detection is enhanced with self-optimization
implemented in the EMS to resolve the detected conflicts. In order to allocate the optimal
candidate PCI for the entire network, and to minimize the interference among neighboring
cells, the site engineering information(longitude, latitude, and azimuth), CGI, and neighbor
cell list are taken into the PCI assignment. The new assigned PCI can be configured in three
manners:
 Immediate and automatic delivery: The EMS delivers new PCIs to the eNodeB
immediately after they are generated.
 Scheduled and automatic delivery: The EMS periodically delivers new PCIs.
 Manual delivery: The EMS generates a notice for confirmation before delivering new
PCIs to the eNodeB.
This feature is enhanced with specific management functions, such as feature settings
(enabling/disabling this feature or its functions, parameter settings, and policy settings),
evaluation (validity, network impact, and expected operation notification), and logging (key
event logging). Therefore, operators can monitor and control feature configuration,
modification, and execution when obtaining the expected result.
The management functions are described as follows:
 Settings
Settings include the following operations:
− Enabling and disabling: Users can enable or disable this feature.
− Parameter settings: Operators can set some parameters about this feature.
− Breakpoint: Operators can set up breakpoints to enhance the feature control
capability. The algorithm can be stopped at the breakpoints and operator
confirmation is needed for process continuity.
 Evaluation
It consists of performance evaluation and simulation preview. Using these methods,
performance evaluation enables operators to control the quality, effectiveness, and
feature impact on the network.
 Logging
This function records key events during the SON process and these events can be used for
query and statistics. Operators can also analyze the log information to learn about the feature
running process and key events.
In LTE TDD eRAN8.1, the eNodeB incorporates the following function:
 Optimization of PCI collision detection and PCI confusion detection
PCI collision detection and PCI confusion detection are independently controlled. When
RRUs are configured, it is recommended that only PCI confusion detection be enabled to
prevent incorrect PCI collision detection.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Dependency
This feature requires WOFD-170200 Automatic PCI Optimization -LTE FDD/TDD.

5.1.5 TDLOFD-110231 Auto Neighbor Group Configuration


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.

Summary
This feature consists of the following functions:
 CA automatic neighbor group configuration
This function automatically configures SCell blind configuration flags.
 MLB automatic neighbor group configuration
This function automatically configures overlapping indicators for inter-frequency
neighboring cells.
The two functions are independent of each other and can be used separately.

Benefits
After this feature is enabled, SCell blind configuration flags and overlapping indicators do not
need to be manually configured, reducing O&M costs.

Description
 CA automatic neighbor group configuration
The SCell blind configuration flag is a CA parameter. A candidate SCell configured with
this parameter can perform blind configuration without measurement.
When this function is not used, users must manually identify cell coverage overlapping
relationships before adding, modifying, or removing SCell blind configuration flags.
Such operations have high requirements on accuracy and are time-consuming.
Based on measurement event statistics and the configurable threshold on the network,
this function automatically identifies inter-frequency neighboring cells whose SCell
blind configuration flags need to be added, modified, or removed. Then, this function
adds, modifies, or removes these flags automatically (or in a controlled way), thereby
reducing manual workload.
 MLB automatic neighbor group configuration
The overlapping indicator is an MLB parameter. This parameter is used for accurate
candidate cell selection in MLB.
When this function is not used, users must manually identify cell coverage overlapping
relationships before adding, modifying, or removing overlapping indicators. Such
operations have high requirements on accuracy and are time-consuming.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Based on measurement event statistics and the configurable threshold on the network,
this function automatically identifies inter-frequency neighboring cells whose
overlapping indicators need to be added, modified, or removed. Then, this function adds,
modifies, or removes these indicators automatically (or in a controlled way), thereby
reducing manual workload.

Enhancement
In eRAN11.1, automatic configuration of overlapping indicators is enhanced by adding the
following subfunctions:
 Automatic configuration of an overlapping indicator for a micro cell
If a micro cell detects that its coverage range is within that of a macro cell, the micro cell
can proactively notify the macro cell to configure an overlapping indicator.
 Automatic configuration of overlapping indicators for a micro cell group
If the coverage ranges of multiple micro cells are within the coverage range of a macro
cell, the macro cell can regard multiple micro cells using the same EARFCN as one
micro cell group. If an overlapping indicator needs to be added to the micro cell group,
the macro cell adds the overlapping indicator to each micro cell in the micro cell group.
If the overlapping indicator needs to be removed from the micro cell group, the macro
cell removes the overlapping indicator from each micro cell in the group.

Dependency
 eNodeB
None
 UE
None
 Transport network
None
 Core network
None
 OSS
None
 Other features
None
 Others
The corresponding neighboring cells must use Huawei devices.

5.1.6 TDLOFD-002005 Mobility Robust Optimization (MRO)


Availability
This feature is available in LTE TDD eRAN3.0.

Summary
MRO aims to reduce ping-pong handovers, premature handovers, and delayed handovers. It is
implemented by optimizing the typical mobility control parameters.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Decreases the call drop rate, reduces the handover failure rate, and speeds up cell
reselection.
 Saves man power cost for typical and common mobility optimization scenarios.

Description
MRO typically adjusts the cell individual offset (CIO).
CIO is adjusted online. CIO explicitly declares the handover threshold between measurement
results of signaling quality from both source and target cells. Therefore, changing the CIO
will shift ahead or delay the happening of handovers. The major MRO parameter adjustment
is the CIO.
Both premature and delayed handovers are captured at the source eNodeB because the source
eNodeB is informed of delayed handovers that have been prepared by the UE context release
mechanism. Only outgoing handover failures are captured.
The reduction of ping-pong handovers exploits the UE History Information that is passed
from the source eNodeB to the target eNodeB during the handover preparation. When the UE
History Information is received, the target eNodeB identifies ping-pong if the second newest
cell's GCI is equal to that of the target cell and the time spent in the source cell is less than a
ping-pong time threshold. Ping-pong handovers are rectified by decreasing the CIO.

Enhancement
 In LTE TDD eRAN6.0
UE-level MRO against ping-pong handovers is introduced. The eNodeB identifies
ping-pong UEs and sends corresponding UE-level MRO parameters to these UEs. This
type of MRO reduces the number of ping-pong handovers, reduces Uu resource usage,
and improves quality of experience (QoE) of UEs.
The UE-level MRO algorithm is independent of the cell-level MRO algorithm. They are
controlled by different switches.
 In LTE TDD eRAN6.1
a. The controllable intra-RAT MRO function is introduced.
Intra-RAT MRO (including intra-frequency MRO and inter-frequency MRO) can be
implemented in free and controlled modes. In free mode, the intra-RAT MRO
procedure is the same as that in eRAN6.0, that is, the eNodeB automatically
optimizes parameters according to parameter optimization suggestions. In
controlled mode, the eNodeB reports parameter optimization suggestions to the
U2000. The U2000 optimizes parameters after the parameter optimization
suggestions are manually confirmed. During the confirmation, users can change the
suggested parameter values on the U2000.
b. The cell reselection parameter optimization for intra-frequency MRO is introduced.
During intra-frequency MRO, the eNodeB checks whether cell reselection
conditions match handover conditions. If they do not match, the eNodeB optimizes
cell reselection parameters. Cell reselection parameter optimization for
intra-frequency MRO can be implemented in free and controlled modes.
 In LTE TDD eRAN7.0
a. The A2-unrelated parameter setting rollback for intra-RAT MRO is introduced.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

If performance counters deteriorate an MRO period after intra-RAT MRO is


performed, parameter setting rollback is implemented.
b. The threshold setting in different intra-RAT MRO scenarios is introduced.
During intra-RAT MRO, users can set different thresholds for different scenarios,
including the thresholds for the proportions of premature handovers, delayed
handovers, and RLF-induced abnormal handovers.
 In LTE TDD eRAN8.0
a. The mechanism for changing the event A1 triggering threshold when the event A2
triggering threshold is optimized by inter-frequency MRO is introduced.
The event A1 triggering threshold is changed when the event A2 triggering
threshold is optimized to ensure that the difference between the two thresholds is
constant. The adjustment range of the event A2 triggering threshold is determined
by the user-specified range.
b. The adjustments of parameters for events A2 and A3/A4 during inter-frequency
MRO are controlled by switches.
A parameter adjustment option is added to allow users to configure parameters for event
A2, A3/A4, or A2+A3/A4 to be adjusted. MRO optimizes parameters based on
parameter adjustment configurations.
 In LTE TDD eRAN8.1
The MRO against unnecessary handovers function is introduced. The measurement of
unnecessary handovers is added. MRO is implemented in the cells where the proportion
of unnecessary handovers is high so that UEs camp on LTE cells in any possible
conditions.

Dependency
None

5.1.7 TDLOFD-081201 Specified PCI Group-based Neighboring


Cell Management
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Available in LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN11.0.

Summary
In scenarios where a large number of micro eNodeBs are deployed around a macro eNodeB,
cells served by micro and macro eNodeBs are assigned with physical cell identifiers (PCIs) in
different ranges. eNodeBs deploy different management policies on neighboring cells within
different PCI ranges and perform handovers from a macro eNodeB to a micro eNodeB based
on the cell global identification (CGI) reading results.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Benefits
 Simplifies PCI planning for scenarios where a large number of micro eNodeBs are
deployed.
 Supports handovers from a macro eNodeB to a micro eNodeB and prevents handover
failures caused by PCI reuse among micro eNodeBs.
 Reduces the operating expense (OPEX), and ensures handovers from a macro eNodeB to
a micro eNodeB.

Description
In scenarios where a large number of micro eNodeBs are deployed around a macro eNodeB,
cells served by micro and macro eNodeBs are assigned with physical cell identifiers (PCIs) in
different ranges. The PCIs are classified into PCIs for cells served by normal eNodeBs
(referred to as PCI range A) and PCIs for cells served by densely deployed eNodeBs (referred
to as PCI range B). To make this feature work, operators need to allocate PCIs in range A and
range B for cells served by macro eNodeBs and micro eNodeBs, respectively. After an
eNodeB receives a measurement report from a UE, the eNodeB checks the type of
neighboring cells contained in the measurement report based on the PCIs.
If the serving cell is served by a macro eNodeB and the detected neighboring cell is served by
a micro eNodeB, the serving eNodeB instructs the UE to read the CGI of the neighboring cell
regardless whether the neighboring relationship with the detected cell of the serving cell is
configured. Then, the serving eNodeB adds or updates the neighbor relationship based on the
CGI reading results and determines the target cell for the handover. In the preceding scenario,
it is allowed that intra-frequency neighboring cells that have the same PCI and are served by
micro eNodeBs are added to an NRT of the cell served by a macro eNodeB, and the macro
eNodeB does not perform PCI confusion detection.
If the serving cell and the detected neighboring cell are both served by macro eNodeBs or the
serving cell is served by a macro eNodeB, this feature does not take special measures.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
 UE
This feature requires support from UEs.
 Other features
This feature requires the TDLOFD-002001 Automatic Neighbour Relation (ANR) and
TDLOFD-002007 PCI Collision Detection & Self-Optimization features.

5.1.8 TDLOFD-081209 Automatic Congestion Handling


Availability
This feature is available as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Summary
Based on condition-based adaptive parameter adjustment rules predefined in an eNodeB, the
eNodeB periodically determines whether to enable adaptive parameter adjustment for a cell
based on the monitored results, including UE number, physical resource block (PRB) usage,
and control channel element (CCE) usage on the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH)
in the cell. If the monitored results meet the conditions for parameter adjustments, the
eNodeB automatically adjusts parameters to improve network performance.

Benefits
In heavy traffic scenarios, the eNodeB automatically adjusts parameters and provides the
following benefits:
 Improved network performance and user experience
 Simplified network maintenance and reduced manpower costs

Description
The eNodeB determines whether to enable adaptive parameter adjustment based on related
adjustment conditions and the monitored results, including UE number, PRB usage, and CCE
usage on the PDCCH. During adaptive parameter adjustment, the eNodeB performs the
following operations:
 Collecting data
The eNodeB periodically collects data source for predefined condition-based adaptive
parameter adjustment rules.
 Evaluating conditions
The eNodeB compares collected data with the predefined parameter adjustment rules. If
the comparison result does not meet the criteria for parameter adjustment rules, the
process in this period ends. If the comparison result meets the criteria for parameter
adjustment rules, parameter adjustment is triggered.
 Adjusting parameters
The eNodeB adjusts parameters meeting related parameter adjustment rules based on the
predefined parameter adjustment measures.
With periodic execution of the preceding three operations, this feature helps monitor the
network load in a timely manner and automatic performs parameter adjustments to improve
network performance.

Figure 5-4 Procedure for automatic congestion handling

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Enhancement
Many condition-based adaptive parameter adjustment rules are added to eRAN11.0.
In eRAN11.1, adaptive parameter adjustment rules based on interference mitigation are added,
enhancing interference resistance for PUCCHs in heavy traffic scenarios and increasing
downlink cell throughout.

Dependency
None

5.1.9 TDLOFD-002011 Antenna Fault Detection


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
Antenna system and radio frequency (RF) channel faults are caused by the following:
1. Incorrect project installation during creation, relocation, or optimization.
2. Natural or external changes.
This feature detects faults on LTE antennas and allows users to detect and locate antenna
faults. In addition, this feature does not require additional instruments for measuring eNodeBs
at the site.

Benefits
This feature improves the efficiency and accuracy of fault diagnosis and reduces project cost.

Description
The antenna system plays an important role in mobile communications. The performance of
the entire network is affected by the following problems:
 Inappropriate type or location of the antenna system
 Incorrectly configured parameters of the antenna system
 Faulty antenna system
This feature allows eNodeBs to detect the following faults and report related alarms:
 Weak received signal
 Imbalance of received signals between the main and the diversity
 Abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR)

Enhancement
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Dependency
None

5.1.10 TDLOFD-002012 Cell Outage Detection and Compensation


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
This feature allows eNodeB to automatically detect cell outage and adjust mobility-related
RRM parameters to compensate outage cells.

Benefits
This feature shortens the duration required to detect cell outages and maintains user services
in the outage cell to the extent possible.

Description
Cell outage is a critical situation, especially when there is only one frequency or RAT. It leads
to service failure or significant KPI degradation. If there are alternative frequencies/RATs,
hand over UEs from the outage cell to the inter-frequency or inter-RAT cell instead of
compensating the coverage of surrounding cells.
This feature consists of cell outage detection, RRM compensation, and cell outage recovery.
 Cell outage detection
Monitors both pre-defined alarms and cell KPIs in real time. According to the
pre-defined alarms, the system detects whether the cell is out of service. KPI monitoring
helps detect abnormal outage cases that will not trigger alarms through cell KPI
degradation, including sleeping cells. Note that the KPI threshold is configurable by
operators.
 RRM compensation
Adjusts the mobility-related RRM parameters to allow UE handovers to the surrounding
cells for service continuity. In addition, the outage cell is added into the blacklist to
prevent handover or reselection from neighboring cells. The priority for handover
triggering is defined in the mobility features to maintain service continuity.
 Cell outage recovery
After cell outage is detected, the system recovers the cell. After outage recovery, the
system reverses the compensation.

Enhancement
To accelerate the cell outage detection process, LTE TDD eRAN6.0 introduces the assisted
cell outage detection method. This method is independent of KPI measurement and detects
cell outage by checking internal eNodeB counters at 5 minute intervals. When the counter
values exceed the specified thresholds, the eNodeB reports the check results to the U2000.
The U2000 then determines that a cell outage has occurred.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

In eRAN7.0: KPI accumulation is introduced for low traffic cell outage detection. When the
KPIs number of one period is lower than the configured threshold, it will be accumulated to
the next period till accumulated KPIs are more than the threshold, and then the system will
calculate abnormal KPIs in accumulated periods to detect cell outage.
In CODC SON Log, it will register the key KPIs information of Cell outage detection and
Cell outage recovery for operator observation and analysis.

Dependency
This feature requires the OSS feature WOFD-171000 Cell Outage Detection and
Recovery-LTE.
If an operator has deployed a GSM and UMTS network, RRM compensation can be improved
by using these two optional features:
 TDLOFD-001019 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and UTRAN
 TDLOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and GERAN

5.2 MLB
5.2.1 TDLOFD-001032 Intra-LTE Load Balancing
Availability
This feature is available as of LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
This feature coordinates load distribution among inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Benefits
Utilizes the network resource efficiently. Improves system capacity. Reduces the possibility of
system overload. Improves the access success rate.

Description
In a multi-frequency network, if a frequency is in the high load state and other frequencies are
not, it is recommended that this feature be enabled to relieve load imbalances among
inter-frequency cells.
With this feature enabled, the local cell checks the load status of itself. If the cell load exceeds
a preset threshold, the local eNodeB collects the load status of inter-frequency neighboring
cells of the local cell. If the load of a neighboring cell is lower than a preset threshold, the
eNodeB transfers UEs from the local cell to the lightly loaded inter-frequency neighboring
cell.
Mobility load balancing (MLB) includes the following procedures: load measurement and
evaluation, load information exchange, MLB decision, MLB execution.
The cell load is represented by the physical resource block (PRB) usage.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

During load information exchange, the local cell collects the load status of neighboring
E-UTRAN cells.
MLB decision includes target cell selection and UE selection.
In the MLB execution, UEs are transferred by using measurement-based handovers and blind
handovers.

Enhancement
 eRAN7.0
Added load measurement and evaluation by using the PRB evaluation value including
the control channels. Operators can define the load evaluation criteria by themselves.
Added frequency priorities for MLB. The eNodeB selects the target frequency for MLB
based on the frequency priorities.
Added blind MLB. Blind MLB is applicable to scenarios where no X2 interface is
available or the X2 interface does not support load information exchange.
Added measurement-based or blind redirections for load transfer.
 eRAN8.1
Added load measurement and evaluation by using the PRB evaluation value excluding
the control channels. Operators can define the load evaluation criteria by themselves. In
addition, the filter factor for the PRB evaluation measurement is now configurable.
Enhanced the UE selection policies, including the UE selection priorities and selection
conditions.
Added the handover performance assurance policies for UEs handed over to the target
cell for MLB. To accommodate this, a timer that protects UEs from being repeatedly
transferred for MLB and UE-specific coverage-related handover parameters are
introduced.
 eRAN11.0
Whether UEs can be selected based on QCIs for MLB and whether UEs are not
preferentially selected based on QCIs for MLB are configurable on eNodeBs.
Frequencies that can be selected as target frequencies based on QCIs are configurable on
eNodeBs.
eNodeBs can transfer only UEs with special SPIDs to dedicated cells.
 eRAN11.1
The uplink and downlink PRB usage thresholds for triggering cell-level MLB can be
configured separately.
The uplink and downlink PRB usage thresholds for UE selection can be configured
separately.
The uplink and downlink PRB usage thresholds for target cell selection can be
configured separately.
The uplink and downlink MLB priorities of a neighboring E-UTRA frequency can be
configured separately.

Dependency
None

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

5.2.2 TDLOFD-001123 Enhanced Intra-LTE Load Balancing


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN6.1.

Summary
This feature resolves load imbalance between the serving cell and the inter-frequency
neighboring cells under the same eNodeB.

Benefits
This feature maximizes the network resource efficiency and improves the UE throughput.

Description
This feature applies when the UE throughput in the neighboring cell is greater than that in the
serving cell but the number of UEs in the neighboring cell is less than that in the serving cell.
The load balancing procedure includes the following steps: load measurement and evaluation,
load information exchange, load balancing decision, execution of measurement and handover.
The serving and neighboring cells perform load balancing as follows:
1. The serving cell measures the number of UEs within itself and at the same time receives
the information about the number of UEs in the neighboring cell.
2. The serving cell compares the two numbers. If the number of UEs within itself is greater
than that in the neighboring cell, the serving cell triggers a handover to the neighboring
cell.
3. The serving cell selects UEs for the handover based on the following principles:
− If the neighboring cell covers a small area, the serving cell selects the UEs located
in the center of the cell.
− If the neighboring cell covers a large area, the serving cell selects the UEs located at
the edge of the cell.
4. The serving cell hands over UEs to the neighboring cell.
Enhanced intra-LTE load balancing applies to the scenarios where coverage overlaps between
multiple inter-frequency LTE cells.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The serving cell and inter-frequency neighboring cell must belong to the same eNodeB.
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

5.2.3 TDLOFD-070215 Intra-LTE User Number Load Balancing


Availability
This feature is available as of LTE TDD eRAN7.0.
This feature is available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.0.

Summary
This feature resolves user number load imbalances between cells and frequencies.

Benefits
This feature achieves better utilization of network resources and balance user number to
reduce the probability of burst traffic.

Description
Intra-LTE User Number Load Balancing contains connected mode and idle mode. It is
recommended in commercial LTE networks with multiple LTE frequencies where one
frequency has a higher user number but other frequencies have lower user number.
For connected mode, serving cell measures its own cell user number, if the number exceeds a
preset threshold, the serving cell will send handover request to the neighboring cells which
shall acknowledge or reject handover judged by their own user number load.
For idle mode, users in normal RRC release procedure can be released to different frequency
on configured proportion, by using Dedicated Priority within RRC Connection Release
message. This function can precisely distribute idle users to different frequency as operators
wish. Especially, if we set the proportion of micro frequency to 100% highest priority, idle
users in micro coverage will only camp on micro's frequency, which is called Fast Discovery
of Micro, it is quite meaningful to the scenario of absorbing users and traffic volume by micro
site.
Intra-LTE User Number Load Balancing is used in scenarios where inter-frequency LTE cells
have highly overlapping coverage.

Enhancement
 eRAN8.1
Enhanced the UE selection policies, including the UE selection priorities and selection
conditions.
Added the handover performance assurance policies for UEs handed over to the target
cell for MLB. To accommodate this, a timer that protects UEs from being repeatedly
transferred for MLB and UE-specific coverage-related handover parameters are
introduced.
 eRAN11.0
Whether UEs can be selected based on QCIs for MLB and whether UEs are not
preferentially selected based on QCIs for MLB are configurable on eNodeBs.
Frequencies that can be selected as target frequencies based on QCIs are configurable on
eNodeBs.
eNodeBs can transfer only UEs with special SPIDs to dedicated cells.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

In user-number-based inter-frequency MLB, when collecting the number of UEs, the


eNodeB can be set to collect the actual number of UEs or the weight-factor number of
UEs.
 eRAN11.1
The uplink and downlink PRB usage thresholds for triggering cell-level MLB can be
configured separately.
The uplink and downlink PRB usage thresholds for UE selection can be configured
separately.
The uplink and downlink PRB usage thresholds for target cell selection can be
configured separately.
The uplink and downlink MLB priorities of a neighboring E-UTRA frequency can be
configured separately.

Dependency
None

5.2.4 TDLOFD-081210 Multi-RRU Cell Load Balancing


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs and LampSite eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature enables an eNodeB to transfer certain uplink-synchronized UEs in a multi-RRU
cell to neighboring cells by using PRB-usage-based inter-frequency mobility load balancing
(MLB) if an RRU that serves the multi-RRU cell is in the high-load state.

Benefits
This feature offloads traffic from an RRU in the high-load state in a multi-RRU cell and
increases UE throughput of a single RRU.

Description
For a multi-RRU cell, this feature allows the eNodeB to evaluate the PRB usage of each RRU
and to select the maximum RRU PRB usage as the cell PRB usage used for evaluating
whether to trigger MLB. When selecting UEs, in addition to other UE selection conditions in
PRB-usage-based inter-frequency MLB, the eNodeB also considers the PRB usage of the
working RRUs that serve UEs.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Figure 5-5 MLB triggering condition

Figure 5-6 UE selection

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires the TDLOFD-001032 Intra-LTE Load Balancing feature.

5.2.5 TDLOFD-001044 Inter-RAT Load Sharing to UTRAN


Availability
This feature is available as of LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Summary
This feature is used in the overlapping area of UTRAN and E-UTRAN networks and the two
systems' load is unbalanced.

Benefits
Improves the system resource utilization rate and guarantees the service requirements.
Reduces the possibility of system overload and decreases the service drop rate.

Description
In scenarios where both E-UTRAN and UTRAN are deployed, if an E-UTRA frequency is in
the high load state and UTRA frequencies are not, it is recommended that this feature be
enabled to relieve load imbalances among inter-RAT cells.
With this feature enabled, the local cell checks the load status of itself. If the cell load exceeds
a preset threshold, the local eNodeB collects the load status of neighboring UTRAN cells of
the local cell. If the load of a neighboring cell is lower than a preset threshold, the eNodeB
transfers UEs from the local cell to the lightly loaded neighboring UTRAN cell.
Mobility load balancing (MLB) includes the following procedures: load measurement and
evaluation, load information exchange, MLB decision, MLB execution.
The cell load is represented by the physical resource block (PRB) usage and the number of
uplink-synchronized UEs in a cell.
During load information exchange, the local cell collects the load status of neighboring
UTRAN cells.
MLB decision includes target cell selection and UE selection.
UEs are transferred to the target cell for MLB by using one of the following methods:
measurement-based handover, blind handover, measurement-based redirection, and blind
redirection.

Enhancement
In eRAN3.0, the eNodeB can select UEs in idle mode for load transfer and can transfer UEs
by using redirection based on the MLB-dedicated frequency priorities.
In eRAN7.0, the eNodeB supports frequency priorities for MLB. The eNodeB selects the
target frequency for MLB based on the frequency priorities.
In eRAN8.0, the eNodeB supports the load measurement and evaluation based on the number
of UL-synchronized UEs in a cell to deploy MLB based on the number of UL-synchronized
UEs in a cell.

Dependency
UEs must support LTE TDD and UMTS networks.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

5.2.6 TDLOFD-001045 Inter-RAT Load Sharing to GERAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN2.1.

Summary
This feature is used when the LTE and GSM systems cover the same area and the load of the
two systems is unbalanced.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Improves the system resource utilization rate while guaranteeing QoS.
 Reduces the possibility of system overload.
 Decreases the service drop rate.

Description
In a commercial LTE network, LTE cells have high load but the load of GERAN cells is low
because of service differentiation. To resolve this problem, the eNodeB uses the load
balancing algorithm.
The LTE cell measures and evaluates the cell load, and then determines whether to perform a
handover to a neighboring GERAN cell. If the LTE cell load is higher than a specific
threshold, some UEs are handed over to the GERAN cell. The cell load is defined as the PRB
utilization rate. For details, see 3GPP TS 36.314.
There is only one type of inter-LTE load balance: active load balance. The active load balance
procedure includes the following steps: load measurement and evaluation, load balance
triggering, UE-dedicate priority update, UE selection for handover, and handover execution.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
UEs must support LTE TDD and GSM.
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
This feature requires TDLOFD-001020 PS Inter-RAT Mobility between E-UTRAN and
GERAN.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

5.3 Power Saving


5.3.1 TDLOFD-001039 RF Channel Intelligent Shutdown
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN2.1.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN6.1.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
When no traffic is carried by a cell configured in MIMO mode, only some of the transmit
channels need to be switched on with the PAs of other transmit channels shut down. In this
way, the power consumption of the no-load eNodeB is decreased. When there is traffic, the
PAs are switched on automatically to have the cell run normally again.

Benefits
If there is no load, the eNodeB can shut down the PAs of some transmit channels, thereby
reducing the eNodeB power consumption.

Description
An eNodeB in the LTE system is generally configured with two or four antennas. The traffic
in the cell varies by time. In some periods (operators can customize the periods), for example,
from the midnight to the early morning, there is no traffic. When the eNodeB detects the idle
status, it keeps only one functional RF transmit channel (if there are two transmit channels) or
two functional RF transmit channels (if there are four transmit channels) to decrease power
consumption. When a UE accesses the cell or the periods end, the eNodeB can automatically
switch on the PAs that were shut down. Then, the cell recovers to the normal state and
continues with services. The service quality of the cell is not affected.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
A cell has two or four transmit antennas, and the cell bandwidth is greater than or equal to 10
MHz.
This feature does not work with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001075 SFN
 TDLOFD-002008 Adaptive SFN/SDMA
 TDLOFD-001098 Inter-BBP SFN
 TDLOFD-001080 Inter-BBU SFN
 TDLOFD-001081 Inter-BBP Adaptive SFN/SDMA

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

 TDLOFD-001082 Inter-BBU Adaptive SFN/SDMA

5.3.2 TDLOFD-001040 Low Power Consumption Mode


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN2.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
In some scenarios, such as a power outage, an eNodeB can be instructed to work in low power
consumption mode. This mode can help prolong the in-service time of an eNodeB powered by
battery.

Benefits
When an eNodeB is derated, its power consumption is reduced and its in-service time
powered by battery is prolonged. Therefore, the possibility of the eNodeB being out of service
is reduced even during periods of extended power outages.

Description
Low power consumption mode is implemented in four levels. If the power supply has not
recovered to its normal state and the power consumption of a level reaches the time threshold
preset by the operator, the eNodeB enters the low power consumption mode of the next level
until the cell is out of service.
Low power consumption mode of the eNodeB is triggered by one of the following conditions:
 Power system alarms
If the power insufficiency or power failure lasts for the period preset by the operator, an
alarm is reported to trigger low power consumption mode of the eNodeB.
 Command delivered by the EMS
The operator can deliver a command through the EMS to instruct the eNodeB to enter or
exit low power consumption mode.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001080 Inter-BBU SFN
 TDLOFD-001082 Inter-BBU Adaptive SFN/SDMA
The battery cabinet must be configured.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

5.3.3 TDLOFD-001041 Power Consumption Monitoring


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN2.1.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
The eNodeB reports the power consumption status to the element management system (EMS).
On the EMS, operators can monitor the change in eNodeB power consumption, and a power
consumption report can be generated.

Benefits
The eNodeB reports the power consumption status to the EMS. Therefore, operators can
monitor eNodeB power consumption. With the power consumption report, operators can
exactly know the benefits delivered by the decrease in power consumption.

Description
The eNodeB periodically monitors the power of each monitoring point and reports the power
consumption within a period. The EMS receives and collects all data about power
consumption. On the EMS, operators can observe the change in power consumption and
analyze the power consumption according to the statistical report generated by the EMS.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature is not available in integrated micro eNodeBs.
UPEU boards except UPEUa and UPEUb boards support this feature.

5.3.4 TDLOFD-001042 Intelligent Power-Off of Carriers in the


Same Coverage
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN2.1.
 Available in micro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN8.0.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Summary
When there is little traffic in an area covered by multiple carriers, some of the carriers can be
blocked, and all services can be automatically taken over by the carriers that remain in service.
When the traffic increases to a preset threshold, the carriers that were blocked can be
automatically unblocked again to provide services.

Benefits
When there is little traffic in an area covered by multiple carriers, some of the carriers can be
blocked, and all services can be automatically taken over by the carriers that remain in service.
This feature helps reduce the eNodeB power consumption without affecting service quality.

Description
When multiple carriers provide coverage for the same area, the traffic of the area varies by
time. In some certain periods, for example from the midnight to the early morning (the
periods can be preset by the operator), the traffic is light. When the eNodeB detects that the
traffic is light, it triggers UEs to switch services on some carriers to other carriers and then
blocks the carriers without any load, thereby decreasing power consumption. When the traffic
increases or the preset period ends, the eNodeB automatically switches on the carriers that
were blocked to recover the functionality of the carriers. In this way, system capacity is
increased without affecting service quality.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature requires TDLBFD-00201802 Coverage Based Inter-frequency Handover.
This feature does not work with the following features:
 TDLOFD-001080 Inter-BBU SFN
 TDLOFD-001082 Inter-BBU Adaptive SFN/SDMA
This feature must be used on networks configured with intra-eNodeB inter-frequency
co-coverage neighboring cells.

5.3.5 TDLOFD-001056 PSU Intelligent Sleep Mode


Availability
This feature is available as of LTE TDD eRAN2.2.

Summary
With the PSU Intelligent Sleep Mode feature, the eNodeB switches on or off some of power
supply units (PSUs) based on power consumption, thereby reducing the power consumption.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Benefits
When traffic is low, the eNodeB switches off some of PSUs to reduce power consumption. In
such a case, each eNodeB may switch off three PSUs to reduce power consumption by 4% to
5%.

Description
This feature applies to AC-powered eNodeBs configured with Huawei PSUs, which are used
to convert AC to DC, and with Huawei power monitoring units (PMUs). The number of PSUs
required is determined by the maximum power consumption of an eNodeB. This feature
ensures that the eNodeB operates normally when fully loaded. The eNodeB, however, seldom
operates at maximum capacity. As a result, each PSU in the eNodeB normally works at partial
output power. The efficiency of PSU power conversion is directly proportional to its output
power. Therefore, a low power PSU power conversion efficiency results in a low power
efficiency overall.
If an eNodeB is configured with multiple PSUs, PSU intelligent sleep mode can shut down
one or more PSUs when the eNodeB is lightly loaded. This way, the remaining PSUs are fully
loaded when operating, thereby ensuring the highest working efficiency.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
eNodeBs are AC powered and configured with storage batteries and Huawei PMUs that
support this feature to manage the power system.
This feature is not available in integrated micro eNodeBs.

5.3.6 TDLOFD-001070 Symbol Power Saving


Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN3.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Summary
This feature enables the eNodeB to turn off power amplifiers (PAs) during the periods for the
symbols that do not contain any data. In addition, the eNodeB takes advantages of multimedia
broadcast multicast service single frequency network (MBSFN) subframes to further reduce
reference signals so that PAs can be turned off for more symbols.

Benefits
When traffic is low, the eNodeB can shut down PAs of some symbols to reduce the eNodeB
power consumption and the static power consumption of PAs.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Description
Among the eNodeB components, PAs consume the majority of power. PAs require static
consumption even when no signals are transmitted. If PAs can be quickly enabled and
disabled, the eNodeB can use the Symbol Power Saving feature.
With this feature, the eNodeB can shut down PAs of some symbols to reduce static power
consumption. To ensure data integrity, the eNodeB determines the time to enable or disable
PAs.
For example, if a cell does not serve any activated UEs, only reference signals in some
subframes need to be transmitted. In this case, the eNodeB can shut down PAs in the
orthogonal frequency division system without reference signals.
If a cell is not configured with the broadcast multicast service (BCMCS), the eNodeB can
configure some empty subframes in the multimedia broadcast multicast service single
frequency network (MBSFN) subframes. If an MBSFN subframe is configured with only one
subframe and contains reference signals to transmit only in the first symbol, the symbol of the
subframe can be configured as an empty symbol. This way, PAs corresponding to such
symbols can be shut down to reduce power consumption.

Figure 5-7 Symbol Power Saving

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature applies only to macro eNodeBs.
Enhanced symbol power saving mode requires UE support. Specifically, UEs must be capable
of identifying and handling MBSFN subframes related to the serving and neighboring cells.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Only RRU3232/RRU3251/RRU3252/RRU3256/RRU3253/RRU3259/RRU3221E modules


support this feature.
This feature is not available in integrated micro eNodeBs.

5.3.7 TDLOFD-001071 Intelligent Battery Management


Availability
This feature was introduced in LTE TDD eRAN3.0.

Summary
With this feature, the battery management mode automatically changes depending on the
selected grid type, which prolongs the battery lifespan.
The battery self-protection function is triggered under high temperature to prevent battery
overuse and subsequent damage.
The battery runtime is displayed after the mains supply is cut off. By considering the runtime,
operators can take proactive measures to prevent service interruption due to power supply
cutoff.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
 Prolongs battery lifespan
 Reduces energy consumption
 Reduces OPEX
 Improves system stability

Description
 Automatic change of the battery management mode:
The PMU board records the number of times power supply is cut off and the duration of
each cutoff. Then, the PMU board determines which grid type is selected and
correspondingly activates a specific power management mode. In grid types 1 and 2,
batteries can enter a hibernation state in which batteries do not charge or discharge,
which helps prolong battery lifespan.

Power Grid Charge Current Hibernat Hibernat Estimate


Supply Type and Limitatio ion ion d Battery
Cutoff Discharg n Valve Voltage Duration Lifespan
Duration e Mode (V) (Days) Improve
Within ment
15 Days Rate
(Hours)

≤5 1 Mode A 0.10 C 52 13 100%


5 to 30 2 Mode B 0.15 C 52 6 50%
30 to 120 3 Mode C 0.15 C N/A N/A 0%

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Power Grid Charge Current Hibernat Hibernat Estimate


Supply Type and Limitatio ion ion d Battery
Cutoff Discharg n Valve Voltage Duration Lifespan
Duration e Mode (V) (Days) Improve
Within ment
15 Days Rate
(Hours)

≥120 4 Mode C 0.15 N/A N/A 0%

This function is under license control. In addition, this function is disabled by default and can
be enabled by running an MML command.
 Self-protection under high temperature:
When batteries work at a temperature exceeding the threshold for entering the floating
charge state for 5 minutes, they enter this state and no alarms are generated.
When batteries work at a temperature exceeding the threshold for the self-protection
function for 5 minutes, they are automatically powered off or the battery voltage is
automatically adjusted.
 Battery runtime display:
After the mains supply is cut off, the eNodeB calculates the runtime of batteries based on
the remaining power capacity, discharge current, and other data. This runtime can be
queried by running an MML command.
The following formula is used to calculate the runtime of batteries:
Runtime of batteries = (Remaining power capacity x Total power capacity x Discharge
efficiency)/(Mean discharge current x Aging coefficient)

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature only applies to the power module PMU02B.
This feature does not apply to micro eNodeBs.

5.4 Antenna Management


5.4.1 TDLOFD-001024 Remote Electrical Tilt Control
Availability
This feature is:
 Available in macro eNodeBs as of LTE TDD eRAN1.0.
 Not available in micro eNodeBs.
 Not available in LampSite eNodeBs.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 5 O&M

Summary
Remote Electrical Tilt Control improves the efficiency and minimizes the OM cost for
adjusting the downtilt of the antenna. Huawei LTE RET solution complies with the AISG2.0
specification, and it is backward compatible with AISG1.1.

Benefits
The application of the RET prominently improves the efficiency and minimizes the OM cost
for adjusting the downtilt of the antenna. The application of the RET brings the following
benefits:
 The RET antennas at multiple sites can be adjusted remotely within a short period. This
improves the efficiency and reduces the cost of network optimization.
 Adjustment of the RET antenna can be performed in all weather conditions.
 The RET antennas can be deployed on some sites that are difficult to access.
 RET downtilt adjustment can keep the coverage pattern undistorted, therefore
strengthening the antenna signal and reducing neighboring cell interference.

Description
The Remote Electrical Tilt (RET) refers to an antenna system whose downtilt is controlled
electrically and remotely.
After an antenna is installed, the downtilt of the antenna needs to be adjusted to optimize the
network. In this situation, the phases of signals that reach the elements of the array antenna
can be adjusted under the electrical control. Then, the vertical pattern of the antenna can be
changed.
The phase shifter inside the antenna can be adjusted through the step motor outside the
antenna. The downtilt of the RET antenna can be adjusted when the system is powered on,
and the downtilt can be monitored in real time. Therefore, the remote precise adjustment of
the downtilt of the antenna can be achieved.
Huawei LTE RET solution complies with the AISG2.0 specification, and it is compatible with
AISG1.1.

Enhancement
In LTE TDD eRAN11.1, two-dimensional RET is introduced to support China Mobile
corporate specifications and to support adjusting the horizontal azimuth based on the
weighting factor of the antenna.

Dependency
This feature is not available in integrated micro eNodeBs.
This feature is not available in scenarios where the TX and RX channels of an RRU3232,
RRU3252, or RRU3256 are changed from 4T4R to double 2T2R.

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 6 Acronyms and Abbreviations

6 Acronyms and Abbreviations

3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project


ABS almost-blank subframe
ACK acknowledgment
ACL Access Control List
AES Advanced Encryption Standard
AFC Automatic Frequency Control
AH Authentication Header
AMBR Aggregate Maximum Bit Rate
AMC Adaptive Modulation and Coding
AMR Adaptive Multi-Rate
ANR Automatic Neighbor Relation
ARP Allocation/Retention Priority
ARQ Automatic Repeat Request

BCH Broadcast Channel


BCCH Broadcast Control Channel
BLER Block Error Rate

CA carrier aggregation
C/I Carrier-to-Interference Power Ratio
CCCH Common Control Channel
CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
CEU Cell Edge Users
CGI Cell Global Identification

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 6 Acronyms and Abbreviations

CP Cyclic Prefix
CPICH Common Pilot Channel
CQI Channel Quality Indicator
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRS Cell-specific reference signal
CSI-RS Channel state information reference signal

DCCH Dedicated Control Channel


DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DiffServ Differentiated Services
DL-SCH Downlink Shared Channel
DRB Data Radio Bearer
DRX Discontinuous Reception
DSCP DiffServ Code Point
DTCH Dedicated Traffic Channel

ECM EPS Control Management


eCSFB Enhanced CS Fallback
EDF Early Deadline First
EF Expedited Forwarding
eHRPD Evolved high rate packet data
eICIC Enhanced Inter-cell Interference Coordination
eMBMS evolved Multimedia Broadcast Multimedia System
EMM EPS Mobility Management
EMS Element Management System
eNodeB E-UTRAN NodeB
EPC Evolved Packet Core
EPS Evolved Packet System
ESP Encapsulation Security Payload
ETWS Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System
E-UTRA Evolved –Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
FCPSS Fault, Configuration, Performance, Security and Software Managements
FDD Frequency Division Duplex

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 6 Acronyms and Abbreviations

FEC Forward Error Correction


FTP File Transfer Protocol

GBR Guaranteed Bit Rate


GERAN GSM/EDGE Radio Access Network
GPS Global Positioning System

HARQ Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request


HII High Interference Indicator
HMAC Hash Message Authentication Code
HMAC_MD HMAC Message Digest 5
5
HMAC_SH HMAC Secure Hash Algorithm
A
HO Handover
HRPD High Rate Packet Data

ICIC Inter-cell Interference Coordination


IKE Internet Key Exchange
IMS IP Multimedia Service
IP PM IP Performance Monitoring
IPsec IP Security
IRC Interference Rejection Combining

KPI Key Performance Indicator

CME Configuration Management Express


LMT Local Maintenance Terminal

U2000 iManager U2000 MBB Network Management System


MAC Medium Admission Control
MIB Master Information Block
MCH Multicast Channel
MCCH Multicast Control Channel

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 6 Acronyms and Abbreviations

MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme


MIMO Multiple Input Multiple Output
min_GBR Minimum Guaranteed Bit Rate
MME Mobility Management Entity
MML Man-Machine Language
MOS Mean Opinion Score
MRC Maximum-Ratio Combining
MTCH Multicast Traffic Channel
MU-MIMO Multiple User-MIMO

NACC Network Assisted Cell Changed


NACK Non acknowledgment
NAS Non-Access Stratum
NRT Neighboring Relation Table

OCXO Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator


OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing Access
OI Overload Indicator
OMC Operation and Maintenance Center
OOK On-Off-Keying

PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel


PCC Primary Component Carrier
PCCH Paging Control Channel
PCFICH Physical Control Format Indicator Channel
PCH Paging Channel
PCI Physical Cell Identity
PDB Packet Delay Budget
PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 6 Acronyms and Abbreviations

PF Proportional Fair
PHB Per-Hop Behavior
PHICH Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel
PM Performance Measurement
PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
PMCH Physical Multicast Channel
PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel

QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation


QCI QoS Class Identifier
QoS Quality of Service
QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

RA Random Access
RACH Random Access Channel
RAM Random Access Memory
RAT Radio Access Technology
RB Resource Block
RCU Radio Control Unit
RET Remote Electrical Tilt
RF Radio Frequency
RLC Radio Link Control
RRC Radio Resource Control
RRM Radio Resource Management
RRU Remote Radio Unit
RS Reference Signal
RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
RSRQ Reference Signal Received Quality
RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
RTT Round Trip Time
RV Redundancy Version

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 6 Acronyms and Abbreviations

Rx Receive

S1 interface between EPC and E-UTRAN


SBT Smart Bias Tee
SCC Secondary Component Carrier
SC-FDMA Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access
SCTP Stream Control Transmission Protocol
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFBC Space Frequency Block Coding
SFP Small Form – factor Pluggable
SGW Serving Gateway
SIB System Information Block
SID Silence Indicator
SINR Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio
SRB Signaling Radio Bearer
SRS Sounding Reference Signal
SSL Security Socket Layer
STBC Space Time Block Coding
STMA Smart TMA

TAC Transport Admission Control


TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TDD Time Division Duplex
TMA Tower Mounted Amplifier
TMF Traced Message Files
ToS Type of Service
TTI Transmission Time Interval
Tx Transmission

UE User Equipment
UL-SCH Uplink Shared Channel
USB Universal Serial Bus

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
LTE TDD
Optional Feature Description 6 Acronyms and Abbreviations

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network


VoIP Voice over IP

WRR Weighted Round Robin

X2 interface between eNodeBs

Issue 02 (2016-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

You might also like